438
1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

  • Upload
    lamnhu

  • View
    221

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0

Alcatel - Lucent 1850

CLI OPERATION GUIDE

PN 8DG 08136 GAAARELEASE DATE = July 2010

ISSUE 02

Page 2: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

This material is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be reproduced, distributed, or altered in any fashion by any entity (either internal or external to Alcatel-Lucent), except in accordance with applicable agreements, contracts, or licensing, without the express written consent of Alcatel-Lucent and the business management owner of the manual.

THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH D.H.H.S. RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS 21 CFR, 1040.10, FOR A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.

Notice

Every effort was made to ensure that this information product was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change.

This manual applies to PRODUCT NAME software. Release notes describing revisions to this software may impact operations described in this manual.

This transfer of commodities, technology, or software, if from the United States, is an export in accordance with the U.S. Export Administration Regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. The export or re-export (further transfer) of such commodities, technology, software or products made from such technology is prohibited without proper authorization(s) from the U.S. Department of Commerce or other appropriate U.S. government agency(s).

All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, translated, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted or distributed by any means, electronic or mechanical, by photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the written permission of Alcatel-Lucent. Preparing derivative works or providing instruction based on the material is prohibited unless agreed to in writing by Alcatel-Lucent.

The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the part of Alcatel-Lucent. Such obligations will only be committed to in a written sales agreement signed by Alcatel-Lucent.

Trademarks

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners..

Conformance statement

Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the guidelines in this document, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the expense of the user.

Security Statement

In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such an event, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.

Limited Warranty

For terms and conditions of sale, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Team.

Documentation

Product documentation is available on Alcatel-Lucent Online Support Documentation and Software web site at http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/osds.

To offer comments on this documentation, visit Alcatel-Lucent Online Support Documentation and Software web site at http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/osds and select Online Services Helpdesk.

Developed by Alcatel-Lucent

Page 3: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF FIGURES .............................................................................................................................. 5

LIST OF TABLES ................................................................................................................................ 7

PREFACE.............................................................................................................................................. 9Preliminary Information................................................................................................................... 9Applicability...................................................................................................................................... 11Scope ................................................................................................................................................ 11History............................................................................................................................................... 12Related Documents ......................................................................................................................... 12Handbook Structure ........................................................................................................................ 13General Information on Documentation ........................................................................................ 13

1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................... 151.1 About this Handbook................................................................................................................ 15

1.1.1 Graphic conventions used ................................................................................................... 161.1.2 Handbook composition ........................................................................................................ 17

1.2 Accessing the Command Line Interface................................................................................. 181.3 Navigation and Manipulation ................................................................................................... 21

1.3.1 Command Completion ......................................................................................................... 211.3.2 Going to the Beginning or End of the Command Line ......................................................... 211.3.3 Breaking off Commands ...................................................................................................... 221.3.4 History of Commands .......................................................................................................... 221.3.5 Go to the Top Level.............................................................................................................. 22

1.4 Command Group Navigation ................................................................................................... 231.5 The Help Command .................................................................................................................. 241.6 Command Line Interface Top Level Structure ....................................................................... 271.7 Command Line Interface Commands ..................................................................................... 281.8 Text Conventions ...................................................................................................................... 291.9 CLI Command Indexes Definition............................................................................................ 30

1.9.1 List of defined indexes ......................................................................................................... 301.9.2 List of indexes defined by user ............................................................................................ 36

1.10 Conventions used in CLI command definition..................................................................... 391.11 Considerations about functionalities supported by CLI ..................................................... 40

1.11.1 Not supported functionalities.............................................................................................. 401.12 Answers to CLI commands.................................................................................................... 411.13 Accessing the Craft Terminal................................................................................................. 42

2 EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT COMMANDS.................................................................................... 43

3 ETHERNET PHYSICAL, GFP AND LAPS MANAGEMENT COMMANDS...................................... 773.1 General Interface management ............................................................................................... 773.2 Ethernet Physical management............................................................................................... 823.3 GFP and LAPS management ................................................................................................... 98

4 ETHERNET PORT MANAGEMENT COMMANDS........................................................................... 1114.1 ETH over MAU........................................................................................................................... 1114.2 ETH over GFP, ETH over LAPS................................................................................................ 1214.3 VLAN Protocol Profile and L2 CTRL frames management ................................................... 129

CLI Operation Guide

Table of Contents

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 1/432

Page 4: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

4.4 Access Control List .................................................................................................................. 141

5 ETHERNET FLOW AND ETHERNET FLOW QOS MANAGEMENT COMMANDS......................... 1535.1 Classifiers.................................................................................................................................. 1535.2 Color Profile .............................................................................................................................. 1595.3 Traffic Descriptor ...................................................................................................................... 1635.4 Flow Group management......................................................................................................... 168

6 MAC/VIRTUAL/PROVIDER BRIDGE PORT AND BRIDGE PORT QOS MANAGEMENT COMMANDS173

6.1 Generic Configuration .............................................................................................................. 1736.2 VLAN Registration Entry management................................................................................... 1766.3 Bridge Port management ......................................................................................................... 185

7 SERVICES MANAGEMENT COMMANDS ....................................................................................... 1957.1 General Flow management ...................................................................................................... 1957.2 ETS-to-Provider Bridge ETS bidirectional flow...................................................................... 1977.3 ETS-to-ETS bidirectional Transparent Mapping (port-to-port configuration) ..................... 2057.4 ETS-to-Provider Bridge ETS ingress unidirectional flow...................................................... 2107.5 ETS-to-Provider Bridge ETS egress unidirectional flow....................................................... 2177.6 Dual Homing management....................................................................................................... 222

8 ETHERNET SWITCH MANAGEMENT COMMANDS....................................................................... 2258.1 General Filtering Database parameters .................................................................................. 2258.2 Filtering Database Entries management ................................................................................ 229

9 SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL MANAGEMENT COMMANDS....................................................... 237

10 IGMP RELATED TOPICS MANAGEMENT COMMANDS.............................................................. 26910.1 IGMP Snooping ....................................................................................................................... 26910.2 IGMP Forced Reporting.......................................................................................................... 287

11 LINK AGGREGATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS................................................................... 295

12 PORT SEGREGATION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS.................................................................. 307

13 PERFORMANCE MONITORING MANAGEMENT COMMANDS................................................... 31313.1 Maintenance Measurement collection .................................................................................. 31313.2 QOS Measurement collection ................................................................................................ 318

14 SUPPORT MANAGEMENT COMMANDS...................................................................................... 32514.1 Alarm List and Log management .......................................................................................... 32514.2 Alarm Profile management .................................................................................................... 33414.3 SW Package management ..................................................................................................... 34214.4 Agent management................................................................................................................. 34914.5 Time management .................................................................................................................. 35814.6 Resource management .......................................................................................................... 36414.7 Abnormal condition management......................................................................................... 36614.8 Auto Provisioning................................................................................................................... 368

15 COMMUNICATION&ROUTING MANAGEMENT COMMANDS..................................................... 37115.1 Agent Address management ................................................................................................. 37115.2 NE Auto-discovery feature..................................................................................................... 374

CLI Operation Guide

Table of Contents

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 022/432

Page 5: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

15.3 IP Management Plane............................................................................................................. 37915.4 IP Management Plane: IP Routing management.................................................................. 388

16 SECURITY MANAGEMENT COMMANDS ..................................................................................... 397

17 CLI QUICK REFERENCE ............................................................................................................... 40517.1 CLI commands listed by Commands Groups ...................................................................... 40617.2 CLI commands listed in Alphabetical Order ........................................................................ 418

ABBREVIATIONS ................................................................................................................................. 429

CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION FEEDBACK................................................................................... 431

CLI Operation Guide

Table of Contents

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 3/432

Page 6: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Table of Contents

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 024/432

Page 7: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1. NES view ................................................................................................................................ 18Figure 2. Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Craft Terminal view ................................................................. 42

CLI Operation Guide

List of Figures

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Issue 02 5/432

Page 8: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

List of Figures

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 026/432

Page 9: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

List of Tables

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 7/432

LIST OF TABLES

Table 1. Product release handbook applicability.................................................................................... 11Table 2. List of Command Groups ......................................................................................................... 27Table 3. Text conventions....................................................................................................................... 29Table 4. Bit Mapping .............................................................................................................................. 37Table 5. Alarm and cause relationship ................................................................................................... 38

Page 10: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

List of Tables

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 028/432

Page 11: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

PREFACE

Preliminary Information

WARNINGALCATEL-LUCENT makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL-LUCENT will not be lia-ble for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.

NOTICEThe product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the part of ALCATEL-LUCENT.Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of edition. However, information is subject to change.This transfer of commodities, technology, or software, if from the United States, is an export in accordance with the U.S. Export Administration Regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. The export or re-export (further transfer) of such commodities, technology, software or products made from such technology is prohibited without proper authorization(s) from the U.S. Department of Commerce or other appropriate U.S. government agency(s).

COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATIONThis material is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. The technical infor-mation of this manual is the property of ALCATEL-LUCENT. No part of this manual may be reproduced, trans-lated, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted or distributed by any means, electronic or mechanical, by photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the written permission of Alcatel-Lucent. Preparing derivative works or providing instruction based on the material is prohibited unless agreed to in writing by Alcatel-Lucent.

TECHNICAL SUPPORTPlease contact your Local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for questions about the infor-mation contained in this document.

To send your comments about this handbook please follow the indication on Customer Documentation Feed-back on page 431.

For all the Technical Support needs (engineering, installation, maintenance etc.) and product training, please contact your Local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assistance Center (TAC).

CLI Operation Guide

Preface

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 9/432

Page 12: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

SAFETY RECOMMENDATION

The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment.

Service Personnel

Installation and service must be carried out by authorized persons having appropriate technical training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and service, so as to prevent any personal injury or danger to other persons, as well as prevent damaging the equipment.

Access to the Equipment

Access to the Equipment in use must be restricted to Service Personnel only.

Safety Rules

Recommended safety rules are indicated in this manual.

Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instruction in this handbook should be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In case of conflict between safety instructions stated in this manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local norms will prevail. If local regulations do not exist, then safety rules stated in this manual will prevail.

NOTICE

THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH D.H.H.S. RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS 21 CFR, 1040.10, FOR LASER PRODUCT.

DANGER

Invisible laser radiation is present when the optic connector is open. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equip-ment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense.

Service Personnel Skill

Service Personnel must have an adequate technical background on telecommunications and in partic-ular on the equipment subject of this handbook. An adequate background is required to properly install, operate and maintain equipment. The fact of merely reading this handbook and the associated hand-books indicated in “Product Information” manual (ref [1] on page 12) is considered as not enough.

CLI Operation Guide

Preface

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0210/432

Page 13: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Applicability

This handbook applies to the following product–releases:

Table 1. Product release handbook applicability

PRODUCT Part Number

1850 TSS-320 3AL 92101 AAAA

PRODUCT RELEASE VERSION Part Number

1850 TSS-320 2.0

NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS

Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator's Guides) are not modified unless the new software "version" distributed to Customers implies man-machine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained procedures.

Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product–release's "version" marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a sub-sequent version, if the screen contents are unchanged.

Scope

This handbook describes the operations concerning commissioning and operation that the operators must carry out as indicated by the software application(s) referred to in this handbook (see Applicability on page 11).

This handbook must be used together with the associated “Product Information” manual and does not replicate information contained into them. In particular, all cautions relevant to safety, rules for EMC and ESD, as well as warnings regarding operations that may cause damages to the equipment, are not duplicated here, but must be retrieved from the Technical Handbook.

When using this handbook it is assumed that the Operators know:

• the structure (hardware composition) and all the possible operating modes of the equipment (prod-uct–release) this handbook refers to;

• how to use a PC and the Windows ambient applications..

CLI Operation Guide

Preface

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 11/432

Page 14: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Intended audience

The present safety guide addresses everyone carrying out work of any kind on 1850 TSS-320 systems.

History

EDITION DATE DESCRIPTIONS

01 June 2007 First validated and officially released issue of this Handbook

02 July 2010 It has been issued to remove a set of not supported commands

Related Documents

The complete list of handbooks related to the 1850 TSS-320 can be found in the following manual::

REF HANDBOOK Part Number

[1] 1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0Product Information

8DG 08136 AAAA

Provides information on equipment, composition, features, characteristics, and hardware set-tings used in various configurations.

CLI Operation Guide

Preface

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0212/432

Page 15: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Handbook Structure

This handbook is divided into the following main topics as described in the table of contents:

PREFACE: It contains general information such as preliminary infor-mation, safety recommendations, scope, history, and related documents. Furthermore, it describes the hand-book structure.

INTRODUCTION: It contains information as accessing, navigation, text con-ventions and command index definition.

COMMANDS: It contains the description of all CLI commands available, with description, syntax definitions and examples.The complete set of CLI commands is divided in com-mands group and they are grouped in chapters.

QUICK REFERENCE LIST It contains the list of all CLI commands for a quick consul-tation.

ABBREVIATIONS: The abbreviation list is supplied

INDEX Index references are listed.

CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATIONFEEDBACK

It contains information on supplying customer feedback.

General Information on Documentation

Refer to “Product Information” manual (ref [1] on page 12) in order to have information about Alcatel-Lucent Customer Documentation organization.

CLI Operation Guide

Preface

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 13/432

Page 16: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Preface

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0214/432

Page 17: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

1 Introduction

1.1 About this Handbook

This Handbook aims to give the user a concise, practical and easy to use document for configuring the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 via its character based Command Line Interface.

Although the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Web interface is adequate enough for most users, access via the CLI may be still important for advanced and detailed configuration and troubleshooting.

This Handbook is a comprehensive resource to all Command Line Interfaces (CLI) available on the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320.

I M P O R T A N T N O T E S

In this Handbook edition a part of commands have NOT the relevant example. In these cases the ‘(tba)’ acronym is present.

At the start of each chapter there is a complete list of the CLI commands described for that commands group, associated to the relevant link.

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 15/432

Page 18: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

1.1.1 Graphic conventions used

In this Handbook the following graphic conventions are used:

This logo explains to you to see the Acrobat Reader version of this Hand-book (.pdf) to have a better consultation of all CLI commands, with hyper link relevant to any command.

This blue box contains generic example of preliminary information.

This orange box contains example of CLI unavailable commands for the Operator.

This dark green box contains the specific example of the relevant CLI com-mand.

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0216/432

Page 19: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

1.1.2 Handbook composition

This Handbook consists of three main parts:

• Part 1 : CLI Navigation

This part is meant to make the user familiar with the use and operation of the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 CLI. Next to describing the various access methods to the CLI, this part will describe in brief some general manipulations to navigate through and to perform some operations on the CLI (this chapter).

• Part 2 : CLI Command Description

This part forms the main part of this Handbook. Here all available CLI commands of the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 are alphabetically described per group selection.

Each command is described in a systematic manner:

• the full name of the CLI command (including the group selection);

• a short description of the CLI command, if needed completed by a description of the pos-sible impact on the user and/or the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320;

• the syntax of the command with a description of each parameter;

• an example to demonstrate the use of the CLI command.

Refer from Chapter 2 on page 43 to Chapter 16 on page 397.

• Part 3 : CLI Command Index

This part allows the user to look up a command alphabetically in its incomplete form or in the rel-evant Commands Groups.Refer to CLI Quick Reference (Chapter 17 on page 405).

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 17/432

Page 20: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

1.2 Accessing the Command Line Interface

Users can access the Command Line Interface via:

• A Telnet session.This requires that TCP/IP connectivity exists between the host from which the Telnet session is opened and the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320.

As soon a session to the CLI is opened, the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 banner pops up, followed by the CLI prompt.

In case of a Telnet session authentication via the System password might be required before access is granted.

The following example shows the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 banner after opening a Telnet session and authentication:

The parameters of Telnet string command are:

• the NE TCP/IP Address, available in the NES view (refer to Figure 1. on page 18)• the Serial Address Port, fixed at 1123

For Login and Password contact the Local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assistance Center.

Figure 1. NES view

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0218/432

Page 21: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

The Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 has the following limitations on the number of sessions allowed:

• Telnet sessions allowed only one concurrent sessions

In the following is shown an example of unavailable access:

In the following are shown some examples of particular cases.

When a Telnet session is in idle state (no commands) for more than 30 minutes, the following message is shown:

Note: to resume the session press any key.

In the following example is show a message when an unavailable command is typed:

In the following example an invalid command (in the “eqpt” command group) has been refused:

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 19/432

Page 22: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

When the output is too much long, it is divided in more parts and the following message is shown among the parts (it depends on Telnet presetting):

When a command is not yet supported by the current release, the following example is shown:

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0220/432

Page 23: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

1.3 Navigation and Manipulation

Manipulation commands are commands that manipulate operations on the command line, for example changing the command group, go to the beginning of the command line, go to the end of the command line, etc.

1.3.1 Command Completion

The CLI features command completion, which means that when starting to enter a command it can be completed by pressing the Tab key.

For example, entering a at the firewall command group selection, followed by a Tab stroke results in the full assign command being completed. Entering “eqpt p” from top level gives the same result.

For the completion to be successful, the part to be added must be unique. Completion works for the command groups, for the commands, for the options, but not for values.

Example:

Note: “Tab” is not shown on screen.

1.3.2 Going to the Beginning or End of the Command Line

Go to the beginning of the Command Line by pressing Ctrl+A.To go to the end of the Command Line press Ctrl+E.

In the following examples the first _ indicates the position of the cursor after pressing Ctrl+A, the second _the position of the cursor after pressing Ctrl+E.

Examples:

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 21/432

Page 24: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

1.3.3 Breaking off Commands

You can break off a command by pressing Ctrl+Z.

This can be useful in a situation where a user is prompted to enter a value which it does not know and wants to abort the command. Instead of being prompted over and over again for the same value, this allows to break of the command.

The command is broken of and the user returns to the command line (see following example).

Example:

1.3.4 History of Commands

To retake previous commands press the up arrow ↑ and come back to more recent commands with the down arrow ↓. Press Enter ( ↵ ) to select and execute the retaken command.

Note: the buffer dimension depends on Telnet presetting.

1.3.5 Go to the Top Level

To return to top level, or to descend one level (in case of nested command groups) type exit :

Example:

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0222/432

Page 25: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

1.4 Command Group Navigation

From top level, you can change to a command group by executing the name of the desired command group.

To obtain a list of all available command groups, execute help from the top level.

Example:

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 23/432

Page 26: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

1.5 The Help Command

Type help from top level to list all available command groups for the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320:

Note: the same result is obtained pressing “?”, that is NOT shown on the screen.

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0224/432

Page 27: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

You can execute the help command from each command group selection (in the following example is shown the “acl” command group).This results in a list of the available commands (and nested command groups, if available) in this particular command group.

Example:

Executing e.g. “eqpt ?” from top level gives the same result as executing help from the “eqpt” command group selection.

Example:

N.B. “?” is NOT shown on screen.

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 25/432

Page 28: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Entering help followed by a specific command, e.g. “help eqpt position” (starting from top level) or “help eqpt” (e.g. on the eqpt command group selection) results in a description of the syntax for the command.

See the following relevant two examples.

Examples:

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0226/432

Page 29: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

1.6 Command Line Interface Top Level Structure

The following CLI command groups are available.

Table 2. List of Command Groups

no. Command Group y/n no. Command Group y/n

1 abnormalcond --- 2 accessctrl √

3 acl √ 4 alarmlist √

5 alarmprofile √ 6 alarmsynth √

7 autodiscovery √ 8 bridge √

9 bridgedbfiltering √ 10 cbpdu √

11 colorprofile √ 12 dcn √

13 debug √ 14 eqpt √

15 extpoint √ 16 flow √

17 flowgroup √ 18 igmpforcedrep √

19 igmpsnoop √ 20 igmpstaticmgroups √

21 inflowclassifier √ 22 interface √

23 intf √ 24 linkagg √

25 log √ 26 mgmtport √

27 mstp √ 28 ne √

29 ntp √ 30 os √

31 ospfarea √ 32 pbflowbid √

33 pbflowinunidir √ 34 pbflowoutunidir √

35 plugandplay √ 36 pmmaint √

37 pmqos --- 38 portportbid √

39 portseg √ 40 resource √

41 routing √ 42 routingstatic √

43 severitydef √ 44 stp √

45 swpkg √ 46 trafficdescriptor √

47 user √ 48 vlanprotprofile √

Note: three dashes ( --- ) means that the relevant command group is NOT available in the current release, while a tick ( ÷ ) means that is available.

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 27/432

Page 30: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

1.7 Command Line Interface Commands

All CLI commands are commands that operate on, or configure, the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320.

For information about equipment and interface configurations(parameter values, etc.) refer to the following manual:Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 CT Operations Guide.

You can execute these commands from top level, preceded by the name of the command group from which the command should be executed.

You can also execute the commands from the command group itself, using the reduced form of the command.

Instead of entering a completely built-up command with all its parameters, you can also enter just the command itself, without its parameters. After this you are prompted to complete the command with the required and the optional parameters.

For the optional parameters you can simply press enter without giving a value.

When in the following chapters the N/A indication is shown, it means that command has no optional parameters (indexes definition) and the correct syntax is the same of the command.

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0228/432

Page 31: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

1.8 Text Conventions

The following Table 3. on page 29 contains text conventions and usage guidelines for CLI commands as they are documented in this Handbook.

Table 3. Text conventions

type of text conventionbold text Indicates basic command and keyword syntax.

Example: show eqpt link statusitalicized text Indicates user-specific information such as slot numbers, user labels,

password, names, etc.

Example: show eqpt position naming[ ] (Straight Brackets) Indicates optional parameters for a given command.

Example: vlan profile vlanprof_userlabel [type ethertype_value]

Here, you can enter either of the following options:

vlan profile vlanprof_userlabel vlan profile vlanprof_userlabel type ethertype_value

{ } (Curly Braces) Indicates that the user must choose between one or more parameters.

Example: interface naming mau default type {10 | 100 | 1000}Here, you must choose one of the following:

interface naming mau default type 10interface naming mau default type 100interface naming mau default type 1000

| (Vertical Pipes) Used to separate the parameter choices within a command string.For example, the command string

interface naming mau default type {10 | 100 | 1000}

separates the choices 10, 100 and 1000.

Examples:

interface naming mau default type 10interface naming mau default type 100interface naming mau default type 1000

“ “ (Quotation Marks) Used to enclose text strings that contain spaces. The quotation marks are required input on the command line.

Example:

eqpt position naming_set_list asap “a b”

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 29/432

Page 32: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

1.9 CLI Command Indexes Definition

The resource naming format implementation has to be designed open to meet different format requirements.

It has to be taken into account that each naming format can use own specific symbols for “AND operation”, “range interval”, “list elements separation”.

This Handbook considers only one naming format which is coherent with the operator label specification document and uses ampersand ( & ), hyphen ( - ), comma ( , ) for respectively “AND operation”, “range interval”, “list elements separation”.

1.9.1 List of defined indexes

The following indexes are defined for indicating specific resources inside CLI commands:

1. ace_indexAn integer value indicating an element of an ACL.

2. aceorder_numberAn integer value, indicating the ordering position of execution of an Access Control Element in an ACL.

3. adminkey_valueAn integer value in the range [1 ... 124].

4. admitted_fractional_rateAn integer value, indicating in Kbit/s the threshold value of the admitted bandwidth on the interface; it is used for triggering PAUSE frames generation.

5. bridge_forward_delayThe Bridge Forward Delay used by STP to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding; an integer value, measured in 0.01seconds, in the range [400 ... 3000] with default value=1500.

6. bridge_hello_timeThe interval between periodic transmissions of Configuration Message by Designated Ports; an integer value, measured in 0.01seconds, in the range [100 ... 200] with default value=200.

7. bridge_max_ageThe maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge; an integer value, measured in 0.01seconds, in the range [600 ... 4000] with default value=2000.

8. bridge_priWritable portion of the bridge identifier (the first 2 byte of 8 byte); an integer value in the range [0 ... 61440] with granularity 4096 and default value=32768.

9. cbs_valueAn integer number, in the range [0 ... 64 MB] with 1 byte granularity.

10. cir_valueAn integer number, in the range [3 kbit/s ... port line rate] with 1 kbit/s granularity.

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0230/432

Page 33: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

11. classifier_idAn integer number, indicating the specific ETS InFlow classifier.

12. confseverity , confseveritynsaThe configured severity or severity “non-service affecting” in the set: critical, major, minor, warning, indeterminate and cleared.

13. ctrl_frame_32bitsIt identifies the control frame types for managing their passing through or discarding and it has the following syntax:

[customerbpdu] [providerbpdu] [slowprot] [802.1x] [providergvrp] [customergmrp] [customergarp] [bridgemgt] [reserved]

This parameter selects to which control frame types the command {pass | drop} applies.If no optional parameter is present, it means all control frames.

Inside the MIB, this information is mapped in a 32 bits string in which each bit (located in position 0 ... 31 with 0 being most significant bit) indicates if the frame type represented by this bit (0 ... 31) is discarded (bit=0) or passed (bit=1). Data frame have to be always passed.

Bit mapping is defined in the Table 4. on page 37.

14. directorypathThe directory of the server in which the SW to be downloaded is stored. It has the form disk/folder/sub-folder/.../sub-folder where the last sub-folder contains the software package.

15. domain_nameThe domain name in the set: ‘eqpt’, ‘ts’ and ‘pm’.

16. dscpAn integer value in the set [0 ... 63], indicating the DSCP value (or the lower bound of a DSCP range).

17. dscp_setAn expression using integer values in the range [0 ... 63], and specific symbols for representing set of DSCP value ranges which are associated to “green” in that color profile.For instance, 12-15&55 means that the DSCP values 12, 13, 14, 15 and 55 are associated to ‘green’ in that color profile.

18. ebs_valueAn integer number, in the range [0-min [64MB, 256 * corresponding_CBS]] with 1 byte granularity.

19. eir_valueAn integer number, in the range [3 kbit/s ... port line rate] with 1 kbit/s granularity.

20. eqpt_typeIt identifies the type of the equipment item.The possible equipment type are listed in the relevant Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Technical Handbook Common.

21. ethertype_value

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 31/432

Page 34: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

A string composed of four hexadecimal characters.

22. extpointin_namingAn integer number in the range [1 ... 8], indicating the specific Housekeeping Input.

23. extpointout_namingAn integer number in the range [1 ... 4], indicating the specific Housekeeping Output.

24. eventtype_idAn integer number, indicating the specific event type (within the allowed set) to be associated to an output external point working in automatic mode.

25. eventtype_nameA string equal to the specific event type string (within the allowed set) to be associated to an output external point working in automatic mode.

26. filenameA string indicating the name of file.

27. filterDbAgeTime_valueA value in the set [280sec (default), 70min, 210min, 14h, 56h] indicating the filtering database Aging Time (see Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 CT Operations Guide).

28. floodinglimit_valueThe ingress port admitted flooding rate expressed in kbit/s (see Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 CT Operations Guide).

29. group_membership_intervalAn integer value, measured in seconds, with default value=260.

30. hh:mm:ssHour, an integer value in the range [0 ... 23]; minute, an integer value in the range [0 ... 59]; second, an integer value in the range [0 ... 59].

31. ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

32. ipAddrBitMaskAn IP address netmask in decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

33. lagsize_valueAn integer value, in the range [1 .. 16].

34. last_member_query_countAn integer value, in the range [1 ... 255] and with default value=2.

35. last_member_query_intervalAn integer value, measured in 0.1seconds, in the range [1 ... 255] and with default value=10 (1sec).

36. macAddrA MAC Address in string hex dash-separated format: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx

37. macBitMaskA MAC Address bit mask in string hex dash-separated format:

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0232/432

Page 35: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx (e.g. FF:FF:E0:00:00:00)

38. maxEthertype_valueSame syntax of ethertype_value. It indicates the upper bound of an EtherType range.

39. maxdscpSame syntax of dscp. It indicates the upper bound of a DSCP range.

40. maxpriSame syntax of pri. It indicates the upper bound of a PRI range.

41. max_response_timeAn integer value, measured in 0.1seconds, in the range [1 ... 255] and with default value=100.

42. maxvlan_idSame syntax of vlan_id. It indicates the upper bound of a VLAN ID range.

43. mstp_instanceThe MSTP instance identifier. An integer value in the range [1 ... 63].

44. mstp_instance_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 63] and specific symbols for representing a set of MSTP instance value ranges. For instance 1-3&21 means that the values 1, 2, 3 and 21 are specified.

45. mtu_valueAn integer value, indicating the MTU/MRU in byte. MTU/MRU allowed and default values are listed in the relevant Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 CT Operations Guide.

46. namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board¼0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port¼0.

47. naming_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 33/432

Page 36: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

r1sr1sl4-7&18p1-5 means that the ports 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 of the boards in slots 4, 5, 6, 7 and 18 are specified.

48. naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

49. neighbor_router_timeoutAn integer value, measured in seconds, with default value=260.

50. ne_priAn integer value, in the range [0 ... 65535], indicating the priority value associated with the Actor’s NE.

51. nelocationA string indicating the location of the node.

52. ospfarea_index The ID of the corresponding OSPF area entry.

53. pbs_valueAn integer number, in the range [0-min [64 MB, 256 * corresponding_CBS]] with 1 byte granularity.

54. pcauseA string representing a probable cause are in the Table 5. on page 38.

55. pir_valueAn integer number, in the range [3 kbit/s ... port line rate] with 1 kbit/s granularity.

56. pkgversionIt is a value in the form xx.xx.xx (e.g. 02.11.00) where:

• the first field represents the Major version• the second field represents the Minor version• the third field represents the Maintenance version

57. port_lnkaggpriLink Aggregation port priority (2 byte). An integer value in the range [0 ... 255] with default value=128.

58. port_path_costThe port path cost. Its value depends on the link speed of the port (e.g. if the link speed of the port is Mbit/s, port_path_cost= an integer value in the range [1 ... 200 000 000] and default value=20 000 000.

59. port_pri

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0234/432

Page 37: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Writable portion of the port identifier (the first 4 bit of 2 byte). An integer value in the range [0 ... 240] with granularity 16 and default value=128.

60. priAn integer value in the range [0 ... 7], indicating the Priority (or the lower bound of a PRI range).

61. pri_setAn expression using integer values in the range [0 ... 7], and specific symbols for representing a set of PRI value ranges which are associated to green in that color profile.For instance 0-3&5 means that the PRI values 0, 1, 2, 3 and 5 are associated to green in that color profile.

62. priyellowAn integer value in the range [0 ... 7], indicating the Priority of the yellow frames.

63. profileThe list of network functionalities enabled on the NE, in the set: ‘sdh’, ‘wdm’, ‘eth’, ‘mpls’ and ‘cp’.

64. ratelimited_valueThe maximum allowed rate, measured in Kbit/s, configured on GFP/LAPS ports.

65. region_revision_levelThe MSTP region revision level. An integer value in the range [0 ... 65535].

66. reporting_intervalAn integer value, measured in seconds, with default value=60.

67. resptimeoutAn integer number, measured in seconds, in the range [0 ... 3600].

68. router_timeoutAn integer value, measured in seconds, with default value=260.

69. severityThe associated severity in the set: ‘critical’, ‘major’, ‘minor’, ‘warning’ and ‘indeterminate’.

70. transportPortNumberAn integer number.

71. user_loginA string representing the user login.

72. user_profileThe security user profile, in the set: ‘administrator’, ‘constructor’, ‘operator’ and ‘viewer’.

73. vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

74. vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 35/432

Page 38: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

75. yy:mm:ddYear, an integer value in the range [1 ... 99]; month, an integer value in the range [1 ... 12]; day, an integer value in the range [1 ... 31].

1.9.2 List of indexes defined by user

The following indexes (xxx_userlabel) are defined by the Operator for indicating specific resources inside CLI commands:

1. acl_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

2. alarmprofile_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

3. asap_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

4. colorprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

5. extpoint_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

6. flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

7. flowgroup_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

8. lag_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

9. ne_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

10. trafficdescriptor_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

11. vlanprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

12. vlanprotprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0236/432

Page 39: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Table 4. Bit Mapping

Protocol Description MAC Address BitData Frames -- 0Customer BPDU (STP, RSTP, MSTP) 01-80-C2-00-00-00 1Provider BPDU (STP, RSTP, MSTP) 01-80-C2-00-00-08 2Slow Protocols 01-80-C2-00-00-02 3802.1X PAE 01-80-C2-00-00-03 4Reserved for future MAC applications 01-80-C2-00-00-04 5Reserved for future MAC applications 01-80-C2-00-00-05 6Reserved for future bridge applications 01-80-C2-00-00-06 7Reserved for future bridge applications 01-80-C2-00-00-07 7Reserved for future bridge applications 01-80-C2-00-00-09 9Reserved for future bridge applications 01-80-C2-00-00-0A 10Reserved for future Provider bridge operations 01-80-C2-00-00-0B 11Reserved for future Provider bridge operations 01-80-C2-00-00-0C 12Provider GVRP 01-80-C2-00-00-0D 13Reserved for future Customer bridge operations 01-80-C2-00-00-0E 14Reserved for future Customer bridge operations 01-80-C2-00-00-0F 15Bridge Management 01-80-C2-00-00-10 16Customer GMRP 01-80-C2-00-00-20 17Customer GARP 01-80-C2-00-00-21 18Reserved for future GARP applications 01-80-C2-00-00-22 to

01-80-C2-00-00-2F19 to 32

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 37/432

Page 40: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Table 5. Alarm and cause relationship

Alarm pcauseCard Fail rupCard Mismatch rutmCard Out rumUnconfigured Equipment uepOR Battery Failure batteryfailFuse Broken fusebrokenSLC Unreachable icpLDC Unreachable icpLAN Alarm lanfailureSoftware Mismatch versionmismatchExcessive Environmental Temperature excessiveenvironmentaltemperatureLink Failure receiverfailureHousekeeping not available housekeepingalarmPLM plmTSF tsfTSD / DEG sdhconcdegradeLOS losLOF lofCSF csfEXM extensionheadermismatchUPM userpayloadmismatchURU uruUAT uatTCA tca

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0238/432

Page 41: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

1.10 Conventions used in CLI command definition

The following conventions are used in CLI command definition.

2 Several commands require operator to define a user label. The node must assure that user labels for a specified resource are unambiguous.

3 Operator can define user labels containing blank characters. In this case, the string must be in inverted commas (e.g. ext point in 2 user label “physical LOS housekeeping”).

4 The ASAP configuration commands require operator to enter the ASAP user label instead of the ASAP index, for simplicity sake.

5 In some commands, the bridge port is referenced by the bridge port number.

6 When an optional value in a command is not provided by the operator, the corresponding currently configured value remains unchanged (if no value had been previously configured the default value applies). In the commands where a different behavior is applied, it is explicitly stated.

7 The CLI command is atomic. If any command parameter setting fails, the entire command is rejected.

8 For commands, which set parameters that are modifiable only when a certain resource is administratively disabled, it is required to check if this condition is satisfied and, if not, to reject the command advising properly the operator.

9 If a CLI command fails, the error code currently defined for the corresponding management function failure has to be reported to the operator.

10 Any parameter, that is retrievable by a show command but that is not significant in a specific scenario in which the command has been applied, is neglected in the show report.

11 The show command must support the optional more parameter at the end of the command for showing information by 24rows pages. For simplicity sake, [more] is not repeated in all show commands along the document.

12 Some commands requires a confirmation for allowing operator an after-editing verification.

13 CLI is allowed to perform ‘set’ operations only if it has granted local access control.There is one exception: the set operation for requesting the access control itself.

14 When the NE is able to support both “condition” and “change” management function of a certain parameter, the command, defined in this document for setting that parameter, refers always to the “change” management function. This policy has to be applied independent of which of the two management function (“change” or “condition”) is referred in the command reference section.

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 39/432

Page 42: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

1.11 Considerations about functionalities supported by CLI

1.11.1 Not supported functionalities

The CLI is expected to perform most of the CT functionalities. The CLI is not required to be used for managing the following functionalities:

• Support Domain:

– Event Reporting: the CLI does not manage spontaneous notifications from the NE;

– PM Filtering: the CLI does not manage own filtering criteria for retrieving History Data from the NE;

– MIB Backup/Restore and SW download: this topics are for future releases.

Note: for managing by CLI the functionalities about file transfer between the NE and a server, issues about the used transfer protocol (802.1e, FTP, ...) have to be deeply analyzed.

• C&R domain:

– Tunnel management: this functionality is not required in the NE.

CLI does not cover also the following management functions:

• Support Domain:

– Condition of Configuration Mode– Inhibit/Allow Logging

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0240/432

Page 43: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

1.12 Answers to CLI commands

The following examples are referred to some answers from the equipment when a CLI command is forwarded and are relevant or to correct/wrong commands or to incomplete commands.

Note: some CLI commands do not get answers.

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 41/432

Page 44: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

1.13 Accessing the Craft Terminal

The Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 equipment is also managed by a Craft Terminal interface. An example of screen is shown in Figure 2. on page 42.For more information refer to the relevant CT Operations Guide.

Also the management of the Data part is made by a graphic interface.For more information refer to the Data CT Operations Guide.

Figure 2. Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Craft Terminal view

CLI Operation Guide

Introduction

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0242/432

Page 45: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

2 Equipment Management Commands

A summary of available commands is listed here:

eqpt position naming_set_list type eqpt_type

eqpt position naming_set_list show type

eqpt position naming_set_list asap asap_userlabel

eqpt position naming_set_list show asap

eqpt position naming_set_list show allowedeqpt

eqpt position naming_set_list show info

eqpt position naming_set_list show ri

eqpt position naming reset

eqpt show allpositions

eqpt show linkstatus

eqpt show nename

eqpt prot manualswitch from naming to naming

eqpt prot show unit naming

extpoint in extpointin_naming userlabel extpoint_userlabel

extpoint in extpointin_naming asap asap_userlabel

extpoint in extpointin_naming show asap

extpoint show in

extpoint out extpointout_naming userlabel extpoint_userlabel

extpoint out extpointout_naming criteria {manual | remote | auto {eventtype_id | eventtype_name}}

extpoint show out

extpoint show outeventslist

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 43/432

Page 46: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

I M P O R T A N T N O T E

In the current release an important restriction has been introduced for the “Equip-ment Management” commands (for some of “eqpt” commands and some of “expoint” commands).

In the CLI set commands for the Operator, the following commands are NOT available:

eqpt position naming_set_list type eqpt_type

eqpt position naming_set_list asap asap_userlabel

eqpt position naming reset

eqpt prot manualswitch from naming to naming

extpoint in extpointin_naming userlabel extpoint_userlabel

extpoint in extpointin_naming asap asap_userlabel

extpoint out extpointout_naming userlabel extpoint_userlabel

extpoint out extpointout_naming criteria {manual | remote | auto {eventtype_id | eventtype_name}}

The previous commands are available for Alcatel-Lucent personnel ONLY.

The following example reports the answer from the equipment when one of those commands is typed:

Although in the following pages each command is shown and described with this note:

N.B. this command is NOT available for Operator.

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0244/432

Page 47: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

eqpt position naming_set_list type eqpt_type

Description

This command allows to configure an equipment expected in an equipment position slot.

The equipment type must be included in the list of the allowed equipment types for that equipment position.

The 1850 TSS-320 supported items for each equipment position are listed in the relevant manual (see Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 “Product Information” manual).

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

eqpt_typeIt identifies the type of the equipment item.The possible equipment type are listed in the relevant Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 “Product Information” manual.

Examples

In the following example after the “eqpt position” command has been typed the “eqpt show allpositions” command that shows the equipment configuration.

N.B. this command is NOT available for Operator.

(example in the next page)

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 45/432

Page 48: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

In the following example a PP20G board has been equipped into the slot 4 of the 1850 TSS-320 equipment:

Note: this command is NOT available for Operator.

(example continues)

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0246/432

Page 49: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 47/432

Page 50: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

In the following example two PIM10GE drawers (“d1” and “d2”) have been equipped into the relevant PP20G board:

N.B. this command is NOT available for Operator.

In the following example is shown the answer relevant to an incorrect provisioning:

N.B. this command is NOT available for Operator.

In the following example a 10GB port (“p1”) has been equipped into the relevant PIM10GE drawer (“d1” and “d2”):

N.B. this command is NOT available for Operator.

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0248/432

Page 51: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

eqpt position naming_set_list show type

Description

This command allows to get the following information about an equipment position:

– the position of the part (board, drawer or port)– the expected equipment type (acronym or empty)

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example are shown three outputs:

– in the first a board type is shown (slot 6)– in the second a drawer type is shown (drawers 1 and 2 of previous board)– in the third a port type is shown (interface 1 of previous drawers)

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 49/432

Page 52: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

eqpt position naming_set_list asap asap_userlabel

Description

This command allows to set the ASAP associated to an equipment position.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

asap_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator

Example

In the following example has been typed a command relevant to a specific board (slot 6):

N.B. this command is NOT available for Operator.

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0250/432

Page 53: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

eqpt position naming_set_list show asap

Description

This command allows to get the following information about an equipment position:

– the Label Key– the status (active, ...)– the associated ASAP User label

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following is shown an example of Alarm Severity Profile relevant to an equipped specific board (slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 51/432

Page 54: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

eqpt position naming_set_list show allowedeqpt

Description

This command allows to get the allowed equipment types for an equipment position.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example are shown the allowed equipment types available for a specific position (slot 6):

(example in the next page)

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0252/432

Page 55: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 53/432

Page 56: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

eqpt position naming_set_list show info

Description

This command allows to get the following information about an equipment position:

– the expected equipment type identification– the expected equipment type acronym of the board– the actual equipment type (empty or acronym)– the equipment status (administrative state: in service, out of service, ...)– the associated ASAP Index– the associated ASAP User label

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example are shown all information about a specific equipped board (slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0254/432

Page 57: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

eqpt position naming_set_list show ri

Description

This command allows to get the Remote Inventory (RI) data of an item in an equipment position.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example are shown the fields relevant to the RI information (Status, Mnemonic, CLEI code, P/N, etc.) for a specific equipped board (slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 55/432

Page 58: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

eqpt position naming reset

Description

This command allows to perform board reset of an item in a specific equipment position.

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

Example

In the following example has been typed a command relevant to a specific board (slot 6):

N.B. this command is NOT available for Operator.

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0256/432

Page 59: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

eqpt show allpositions

Description

This command allows to get the expected equipment type for all slot positions (boards, drawers and ports).This command has the same objective of command “eqpt position naming_set_list show type”, but applied to all NE slot positions (for practical use).

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown the information about all the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 equipment slot positions, in the specific:

– position (referred to board or drawer or port)– expected equipment type mnemonic (acronym, unknown or empty)– actual equipment type (acronym or empty)– equipment status (administrative state: in service, out of service, ...)

(example in the next pages)

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 57/432

Page 60: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

(example continues)

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0258/432

Page 61: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 59/432

Page 62: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

eqpt show linkstatus

Description

This command allows to get the status of the backpanel links from Matrix (MT320 units, both main and spare) to ports and viceversa. (tbc)

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown the Rx/Tx status between a single port (at board/drawer/port level) and the active MT320 unit (example without ports into the shelf):

(example in the next page)

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0260/432

Page 63: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 61/432

Page 64: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

eqpt show nename

Description

This command allows to get the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element name.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown the information relevant to:

– the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 equipment name – the associated equipment release (rel. 2.0)

2.0

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0262/432

Page 65: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

eqpt prot manualswitch from naming to naming

Description

This command allows to initiate/terminate a manual switch operation (either to main or spare protection unit).This command is allowed if the equipment position, from and to which the switch is perfomed, belong to the same EPS group.

N.B. in the current release the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 equipment supports Matrix (MT320 units) in EPS 1+1 protection schema only, which is automatically created by the node.

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

N.B. when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

N.B. in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

Example

In the following example has been typed a command relevant to a switch between matrices (MT320 units):

N.B. this command is NOT available for Operator.

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 63/432

Page 66: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

eqpt prot show unit naming

Description

This command allows to get information about a protection unit of a protection group.

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

N.B. when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

N.B. in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

Example

In the following two examples is shown EPS protection:

– the first is relevant to the Matrix unit (MT320, position 10);– the second is relevant to the Equipment Controller unit (EC320, position 1):

this feature is NOT available in the current release.

(examples in the next page)

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0264/432

Page 67: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 65/432

Page 68: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

extpoint in extpointin_naming userlabel extpoint_userlabel

Description

This command allows to set the user label associated to an External Point Input.

Syntax Definitions

extpointin_namingAn integer number in the range [1 ... 8], indicating the specific Housekeeping Input.

extpoint_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example has been typed a command relevant to a specific Housekeeping Input (Input 1):

N.B. this command is NOT available for Operator.

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0266/432

Page 69: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

extpoint in extpointin_naming asap asap_userlabel

Description

This command allows to set the ASAP associated to an External Point Input.

Syntax Definitions

extpointin_namingAn integer number in the range [1 ... 8], indicating the specific Housekeeping Input.

asap_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example has been typed a command relevant to a specific Housekeeping Input (Input 1):

N.B. this command is NOT available for Operator.

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 67/432

Page 70: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

extpoint in extpointin_naming show asap

Description

This command allows to get the user label and ASAP (index and user label) associated to a specific External Point Input.

Syntax Definitions

extpointin_namingAn integer number in the range [1 ... 8], indicating the specific Housekeeping Input.

Example

In the following example are shown information for a specific Housekeeping Input (Input 3):

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0268/432

Page 71: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

extpoint show in

Description

This command allows to get the user label and ASAP (index and user label) associated to all External Point Inputs.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example are shown information for all Housekeeping Input (eight inputs are provided):

(example in the next page)

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 69/432

Page 72: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0270/432

Page 73: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

extpoint out extpointout_naming userlabel extpoint_userlabel

Description

This command allows to set the user label associated to an External Point Output.

Syntax Definitions

extpointout_namingAn integer number in the range [1 ... 4], indicating the specific Housekeeping Output.

extpoint_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example has been typed a command relevant to a specific Housekeeping Output (Output 2):

N.B. this command is NOT available for Operator.

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 71/432

Page 74: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

extpoint out extpointout_naming criteria {manual | remote | auto {eventtype_id | eventtype_name}}

Description

This command allows to set:

– the output criteria associated to an External Point Output;– the event type that must be associated to an external point output ONLY when ‘criteria=auto’;

when ‘criteria≠auto’, it must not be associated; the operator can provide either the identifier number or the identifier name of the desired event as defined in the event table.

When event type is provided, this command is allowed if the event type is one of the allowed event types.

Syntax Definitions

extpointout_namingAn integer number in the range [1 ... 4], indicating the specific Housekeeping Output.

eventtype_idAn integer number, indicating the specific event type (within the allowed set) to be associated to an output external point working in automatic mode.

eventtype_nameA string equal to the specific event type string (within the allowed set) to be associated to an output external point working in automatic mode.

Example

In the following example has been typed a command relevant to a specific Housekeeping Output (Output 1):

N.B. this command is NOT available for Operator.

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0272/432

Page 75: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

extpoint show out

Description

This command allows to get information associated to all External Point Outputs.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example are shown information for all Housekeeping Output (four outputs are provided):

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 73/432

Page 76: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

extpoint show outeventslist

Description

This command allows to get the list of events (with corresponding identifiers) that can be associated to an External Point Output, when automatic management is active. (tbc)

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example are shown information relevant to the events for Housekeeping. (tbc)

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0274/432

Page 77: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 75/432

Page 78: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Equipment Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0276/432

Page 79: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

3 Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management Commands

3.1 General Interface management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

interface show [naming_set_list]

interface trafficshow [naming_set_list]

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 77/432

Page 80: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface show [naming_set_list]

Description

This command allows to retrieve the following information of the configured interfaces:

– the interface position (port)– the interface type– the client type– the administrative status– the traffic port enabled

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example is shown the report relevant to a specific board (slot 6); all configured interface information of that board are shown:

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0278/432

Page 81: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

In the following example is shown the report relevant to all interfaces configured in the equipment:

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 79/432

Page 82: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface trafficshow [naming_set_list]

Description

This command allows to retrieve the following information of the configured interfaces:

– the interface position (port)– the administrative status– the traffic port enabled– the operational status– the line rate (speed)– the traffic rate to which transmission is limited (for remote Ethernet port only)– the ingress port admitted Flooding Rate (i.e. the threshold value of received admitted

bandwidth generating flooding traffic, on this ingress interface)

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example is shown the report relevant to a specific board (slot 6); all configured interface information of that board are shown:

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0280/432

Page 83: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

In the following example is shown the report relevant to all interfaces configured in the equipment:

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 81/432

Page 84: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

3.2 Ethernet Physical management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

interface position naming_set_list localeth defaulttype {10 | 100 | 1000 | 10ge-r | 10ge-sr | 10ge-lr | 10ge-er}

interface position naming_set_list localeth show mauinfo

interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg {enable | disable}

interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg restart

interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg advertisedcapability [10 | 100 | 1000 | 10&100 | 10&100&1000] [nopause | asympause | sympause | asym&sympause]

interface position naming_set_list localeth show autoneg

interface position naming_set_list localeth rcfaction {none | shutdown}

interface position naming_set_list localeth show rcfaction

interface position naming_set_list localeth loopback {line | internal} {enable | disable}

interface position naming_set_list localeth show loopback

interface position naming_set_list localeth trafficstatus {enable | disable}

interface position naming_set_list localeth floodinglimit floodinglimit_value

interface position naming_set_list localeth show trafficconditioning

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0282/432

Page 85: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth defaulttype {10 | 100 | 1000 | 10ge-r | 10ge-sr | 10ge-lr | 10ge-er}

Description

This command allows to set the default MAU type for interface. The 10ge-xx values are for 10GE interfaces.

Note: in the current release this command applies only to electrical FE, electrical GE and 10GE interfaces; furthermore the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 equipment supports only:

– Full-Duplex mode;– one allowed type for optical FE (100BaseFX-FD) and optical GE (1000BaseX-FD) interfaces.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example have been typed two commands for a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 8):

– the first is relevant to set a specific port (10ge-er type);– the second has been typed to report all the relevant MAU information.

(example in the next page)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 83/432

Page 86: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0284/432

Page 87: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth show mauinfo

Description

This command allows to retrieve general MAU information:

– MAU status– operational status– jack connector type (fiber)– jabber status (it is meaningful only for 10BaseT)– allowed MAU types– MAU defaut type– autonegotiation supported– optical channel type (B&W or Colored)– optical wavelength (lambda)– optical channel spacing– ASAP pointer

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following is shown an example of MAU information relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 8):

(example in the next page)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 85/432

Page 88: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0286/432

Page 89: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg {enable | disable}

Description

This command allows to enable or disable the Autonegotiation on an interface MAU.

Note: in the current release, this command does not apply to Optical FE and 10GE interfaces, since they do not support autonegotiation, and to Electrical 1GE interfaces, since they support mandatory autonegotiation. It applies to Electrical FE and optical 1GE interfaces that support configurable autonegotiation.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 8):

Refer to the example of “interface position naming_set_list localeth show autoneg” command to see the relevant status after the operation.

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 87/432

Page 90: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg restart

Description

This command allows to restart the Autonegotiation.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 8):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0288/432

Page 91: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg advertisedcapability [10 | 100 | 1000 | 10&100 | 10&100&1000] [nopause | asympause | sympause | asym&sympause]

Description

This command allows to set the Autonegotiation capability to be advertised, i.e.:

– the MAU type;– the PAUSE frame handling capability; each possible value corresponds to a defined

combination of capability bits from 8 to 11:

– 0000 for ‘no pause’– 1100 for ‘asymmectric pause’ (default value)– 1010 for ‘symmectric pause’– 1111 for ‘asymmetric and symmectric pause’

Note: in the current release Optical GE interfaces advertise only mau type = 1000BaseX-FD.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 89/432

Page 92: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth show autoneg

Description

This command allows to report:

– whether or not the auto-negotiation is enabled on the MAU;– the current status of the auto-negotiation process;– auto-negotiation capabilities supported by MAU;– auto-negotiation capabilities advertised by MAU;– the auto-negotiation capabilities advertised by the remote end: reported capabilities are con-

sidered meaningful only after the auto-negotiation has been completed.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 8):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0290/432

Page 93: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth rcfaction {none | shutdown}

Description

This command allows to set the type of consequent action triggered by the Remote Client Fail indication. It can be:

– No action (default value)– Forced Transmitter shut-down

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example have been typed four commands:

– the first is relevant to set the ‘shutdown’ parameter to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6);

– the second has been typed to report all the relevant Remote Client Fail indication information;– the third is relevant to set the ‘none’ parameter to the same port;– the fourth has been typed to report all the relevant Remote Client Fail indication information

update.

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 91/432

Page 94: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth show rcfaction

Description

This command allows to report the type of consequent action triggered by the Remote Client Fail indication.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example is shown the Remote Client Fail status relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 8):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0292/432

Page 95: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth loopback {line | internal} {enable | disable}

Description

This command allows to enable/disable a Line Loopback or an Internal Loopback on interface.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example have been typed two commands:

– the first is relevant to disable an internal loopback on a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6);

– the second is relevant to disable a line loopback on the same port.

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 93/432

Page 96: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth show loopback

Description

This command allows to show if and which type of Loopback is enabled on interface.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example is shown the Loopback status relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 8):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0294/432

Page 97: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth trafficstatus {enable | disable}

Description

This command allows to configure the current port transmit/receive state on the given interfaces.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 95/432

Page 98: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth floodinglimit floodinglimit_value

Description

This command allows to configure the ingress port admitted flooding rate (i.e. the threshold value of the incoming admitted bandwidth, generating flooding traffic, on this ingress interface).

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

floodinglimit_valueThe ingress port admitted flooding rate expressed in kbit/s (see Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 CT Operations Guide).

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0296/432

Page 99: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth show trafficconditioning

Description

This command allows to show for each given port:

– the current port transmit/receive state on the given interfaces– the ingress port admitted flooding rate

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 97/432

Page 100: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

3.3 GFP and LAPS management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth ratelimited ratelimited_value

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth sl {auto | eqptnonspec}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth csf {disable | bidir | unidir | backward | univcais}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth fcs {disable | enable}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth asap asap_userlabel

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth flag {one | two}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth errorframe {abortseq | fcs}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth trafficstatus {enable | disable}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth floodinglimit floodinglimit_value

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth show trafficconditioning

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth show mappinginfo

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 0298/432

Page 101: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth ratelimited ratelimited_value

Description

This command allows to set the raffic rate to which transmission is limited.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

ratelimited_valueThe maximum allowed rate, measured in Kb/s, configured on GFP/LAPS ports.

Example

In the following example have been typed four commands:

– the first is relevant to set to 0 the traffic value to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 2 of board in slot 6);

– the second has been typed to change that value (it is set to 10) to the same port;– the third is relevant to change to 0 the traffic value to the same port;– the fourth has been typed to report all the relevant information about the mapping (it is not

shown the output of the command).

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 99/432

Page 102: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth sl {auto | eqptnonspec}

Description

This command allows to force or disable equipment-non-specific Signal Label.The NE default value is automatic (‘auto’).

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 2 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02100/432

Page 103: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth csf {disable | bidir | unidir | backward | univcais}

Description

This command allows to set the CSF transmit capability, by choosing between:

– ‘disable’ (0): no consequent action (IDLE insertion);– ‘bidir’ (1): enable the usage of GFP CSF transmit capability in 'bi-directional mode';– ‘unidir’ (2): enable the usage of GFP CSF transmit capability in 'uni-directional mode';– ‘backward’ (3): enable the usage of GFP CSF transmit capability only in the 'backward direc-

tion mode';– ‘univcais’ (4): enable the usage of VC-AIS uni-directional transmit capability.

The default value for the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 is ‘disable’.

N.B. in the current release the uni-directional VC-AIS Transmit Capability is not supported.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 2 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 101/432

Page 104: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth fcs {disable | enable}

Description

This command allows to set the usage of FCS. The NE default value is ‘disable’.This command applies only to GFP remote port.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 2 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02102/432

Page 105: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth asap asap_userlabel

Description

This command allows to change the ASAP pointer associated to the mapping layer.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

asap_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 103/432

Page 106: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth flag {one | two}

Description

This command allows to set if one or two flags are inserted between two consecutive LAPS frames. The NE default value is ‘two’.This command applies only to LAPS remote port.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 2 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02104/432

Page 107: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth errorframe {abortseq | fcs}

Description

This command allows to set the Errored Frame handling mode, that can be transmission of either:

– abort sequence– frames with FCS error insertion

This command applies only to LAPS remote port.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 2 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 105/432

Page 108: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth trafficstatus {enable | disable}

Description

This command allows to configure the current port transmit/receive state on the given interfaces.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02106/432

Page 109: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth floodinglimit floodinglimit_value

Description

This command allows to configure the ingress port admitted flooding rate (i.e. the threshold value of the incoming admitted bandwidth, generating flooding traffic, on this ingress interface).

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

floodinglimit_valueThe ingress port admitted flooding rate expressed in kbit/s (see Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 “Product Information” manual).

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 107/432

Page 110: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth show trafficconditioning

Description

This command allows to show for each given port:

– the current port transmit/receive state on the given interfaces– the ingress port admitted flooding rate

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02108/432

Page 111: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth show mappinginfo

Description

This command allows to retrieve the following information:

– format (only for GFP)– type of GFP header as inferred by EXI field (only for GFP)– interface status– interface configuration– server layer– SDH configuration– Signal label configuration– Equipment-non-specific Signal Label sending control– ASAP pointer– CSF Transmit capability (only for GFP)– FCS support (only for GFP)– Received GFP Header client type as inferred from UPI field value (only for GFP)– Presence of GFP FCS in received frames as inferred from PFI bit (only for GFP)– flag insertion (only for LAPS)– Erroneus frames handling mode (only for LAPS)

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 109/432

Page 112: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Example

In the following example is shown an example of Ethernet Mapping Interface information relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 2 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02110/432

Page 113: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

4 Ethernet Port Management Commands

4.1 ETH over MAU

A summary of available commands is listed here:

interface position naming_set_list localeth {activate | deactivate}

interface position naming_set_list localeth portservice {ets | bridge}

interface position naming_set_list localeth maxmtu mtu_value

interface position naming_set_list localeth defaultflowcontrol {nopause | asympause | sympause}

interface position naming_set_list localeth admittedfractionalrate admitted_fractional_rate

interface position naming_set_list localeth ethasap asap_userlabel

intf position naming_set_list localeth config [defaulttype {10 | 100 | 1000 | 10ge-r | 10ge-sr | 10ge-lr | 10ge-er}] [asap asap_userlabel] [rcfaction {none | shutdown}] [trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [floodinglimit floodinglimit_value] [portservice {ets | bridge}] [maxmtu mtu_value] [defaultflowcontrol {nopause | asympause | sympause}] [admittedfractionalrate admitted_fractional_rate] [ethasap asap_userlabel]

interface position naming_set_list localeth show ethinfo

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 111/432

Page 114: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth {activate | deactivate}

Description

This command allows to create and administratively enable or disable a Ethernet Local port: MAU, Ety, Ety/Eth, EFC, Eth_T layers

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following examples have been typed two commands:

– the first is relevant to the activation of a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6);– the second is relevant to the deactivation of the same port.

Note: the deactivation of the local interface is necessary to set all the following commands.

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02112/432

Page 115: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth portservice {ets | bridge}

Description

This command allows to configure the port type (local). It means configuring promisquous mode and client type.The default NE value is ‘ets’.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 113/432

Page 116: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth maxmtu mtu_value

Description

This command allows to configure the port maximum MTU/MRU (local), replacing the default MTU/MRU value.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

mtu_valueAn integer value, indicating the MTU/MRU in byte. MTU/MRU allowed and default values are listed in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 CT Operations Guide.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02114/432

Page 117: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth defaultflowcontrol {nopause | asympause | sympause}

Description

This command allows to set the Ethernet PAUSE frame handling capability to be applied when autonegotiation is disabled.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 115/432

Page 118: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth admittedfractionalrate admitted_fractional_rate

Description

This command allows to set the Admitted Fractional Rate on an Ethernet port, for triggering Pause frame generation.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

admitted_fractional_rateAn integer value, indicating in Kbit/s the threshold value of the admitted bandwidth on the interface; it is used for triggering PAUSE frames generation.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02116/432

Page 119: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth ethasap asap_userlabel

Description

This command allows to change the ASAP pointer associated to the Ethernet layer.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

asap_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 117/432

Page 120: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

intf position naming_set_list localeth config [defaulttype {10 | 100 | 1000 | 10ge-r | 10ge-sr | 10ge-lr | 10ge-er}] [asap asap_userlabel] [rcfaction {none | shutdown}] [trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [floodinglimit floodinglimit_value] [portservice {ets | bridge}] [maxmtu mtu_value] [defaultflowcontrol {nopause | asympause | sympause}] [admittedfractionalrate admitted_fractional_rate] [ethasap asap_userlabel]

Description

See previous commands. It is useful for script editing (local port).

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

mtu_valueAn integer value, indicating the MTU/MRU in byte. MTU/MRU allowed and default values are listed in the relevant Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 CT Operations Guide.

admitted_fractional_rateAn integer value, indicating in Kbit/s the threshold value of the admitted bandwidth on the interface; it is used for triggering PAUSE frames generation.

floodinglimit_valueThe ingress port admitted flooding rate expressed in kbit/s (see Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 CT Operations Guide).

asap_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02118/432

Page 121: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list localeth show ethinfo

Description

This command allows to get the following Ethernet port information (local):

– the administrative status– the operative status– the system time at which the port has entered the current operational state– the interface type– the line rate– the available bandwidth– the interface maximum MTU/MRU– the interface mode– the Ethernet local MAC Address (if local Mac Address is unavailable, it is set to

00:00:00:00:00:00)– if the interface has a physical connector– the handling of the incoming errored Ethernet frames– the Ethernet port client layer– the automatically assigned bridge port number– the PAUSE frame handling capability to be applied when autonegotiation is disabled– the admitted fractional rate– the encapsulation method used by the local Ethernet entity (e.g. ethernetV2, llc-snap)– the ASAP associated to the Ethernet port

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 119/432

Page 122: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Example

In the following example is shown all Local Ethernet Interface information relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02120/432

Page 123: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

4.2 ETH over GFP, ETH over LAPS

A summary of available commands is listed here:

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth {activate | deactivate}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth portservice {ets | bridge}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth maxmtu mtu_value

intf position naming_set_list remoteeth config [ratelimited ratelimited_value] [sl {auto | eqptnonspec}] [trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [floodinglimit floodinglimit_value] [asap asap_userlabel] [portservice {ets | bridge}] [maxmtu mtu_value] [[[csf {disable | bidir | unidir | backward | univcais}] [fcs {disable | enable}]] | [[flag {one | two}] [errorframe {abortseq | fcs}]]]

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth show ethinfo

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 121/432

Page 124: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth {activate | deactivate}

Description

This command allows to administratively enable/disable an Ethernet Remote port on either GFP or LAPS port.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following examples have been typed two commands:

– the first is relevant to the activation of a specific port (interface 2 of drawer 2 of board in slot 6);– the second is relevant to the deactivation of the same port.

Note: the deactivation of the remote interface is necessary to set all the following commands.

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02122/432

Page 125: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth portservice {ets | bridge}

Description

This command allows to configure the port type (remote). It means configuring promiscuous mode and client type.The default NE value is ‘ets’.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 2 of drawer 2 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 123/432

Page 126: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth maxmtu mtu_value

Description

This command allows to configure the port maximum MTU/MRU (remote), replacing the default MTU/MRU value.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

mtu_valueAn integer value, indicating the MTU/MRU in byte. MTU/MRU allowed and default values are listed in the relevant Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 CT Operations Guide.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 2 of drawer 2 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02124/432

Page 127: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

intf position naming_set_list remoteeth config [ratelimited ratelimited_value] [sl {auto | eqptnonspec}] [trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [floodinglimit floodinglimit_value] [asap asap_userlabel] [portservice {ets | bridge}] [maxmtu mtu_value] [[[csf {disable | bidir | unidir | backward | univcais}] [fcs {disable | enable}]] | [[flag {one | two}] [errorframe {abortseq | fcs}]]]

Description

See previous commands. It is useful for script editing (remote port).

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

mtu_valueAn integer value, indicating the MTU/MRU in byte. MTU/MRU allowed and default values are listed in the relevant Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 CT Operations Guide.

ratelimited_valueThe maximum allowed rate, measured in Kb/s, configured on GFP/LAPS ports.

floodinglimit_valueThe ingress port admitted flooding rate expressed in kbit/s (see Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 CT Operations Guide).

asap_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 125/432

Page 128: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02126/432

Page 129: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth show ethinfo

Description

This command allows to get the following Ethernet port information (remote):

– the administrative status– the operative status– the system time at which the port has entered the current operational state– the interface type– the line rate– the available bandwidth– the interface maximum MTU/MRU– the interface mode– the Ethernet local MAC Address (if local Mac Address is unavailable, it is set to

00:00:00:00:00:00)– if the interface has a physical connector– the handling of the incoming errored Ethernet frames– the Ethernet port client layer– the automatically assigned bridge port number

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example is shown Remote Ethernet Interface information relevant to a specific port (interface 2 of drawer 2 of board in slot 6):

(example in the next page)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 127/432

Page 130: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02128/432

Page 131: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

4.3 VLAN Protocol Profile and L2 CTRL frames management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

interface position naming_set_list vlanprotprofile bind vlanprotprof_userlabel

interface position naming_set_list vlanprotprofile default

interface position naming_set_list vlanprotprofile activate vlanprotprof_userlabel [type ethertype_value]

interface position naming_set_list vlanprotprofile show [vlanprotprof_userlabel]

interface position naming_set_list l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}

interface position naming_set_list show vlanprotprofile

interface position naming_set_list show vlanset

interface position naming_set_list show l2ctrlframe

vlanprotprofile activate vlanprotprof_userlabel [type ethertype_value]

vlanprotprofile delete vlanprotprof_userlabel

vlanprotprofile show [vlanprof_userlabel]

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 129/432

Page 132: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list vlanprotprofile bind vlanprotprof_userlabel

Description

This command allows to associate a VLAN protocol profile to an Ethernet port configured as ETS port: incoming Ethernet frames, received on that Ethernet interface and matching that VLAN EtherType, are handled as VLAN Tagged frame (either Q-Tagged or P-Tagged).

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

vlanprotprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 2 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02130/432

Page 133: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list vlanprotprofile default

Description

This command allows to associate the default VLAN protocol profile to an Ethernet port configured as ETS port.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 2 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 131/432

Page 134: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list vlanprotprofile activate vlanprotprof_userlabel [type ethertype_value]

Description

This command allows to create and activate a VLAN protocol profile, defining its user label and optionally EtherType. If ‘ethertype_value’ is not specified, it is initiated with 0x8100 value.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

ethertype_valueA string composed of four hexadecimal characters.

vlanprotprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to a specific port (interface 2 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02132/432

Page 135: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list vlanprotprofile show [vlanprotprof_userlabel]

Description

This command allows to delete a VLAN protocol profile.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

vlanprotprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following is shown an example of VLan User Label information relevant to a specific port (interface 2 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 133/432

Page 136: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}

Description

This command allows to configure how to manage L2 Control Frames (passed or discarded) received at a certain Ethernet port configured as ETS port.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

ctrl_frame_32bitsIt identifies the control frame types for managing their passing through or discarding and it has the following syntax:

[customerbpdu] [providerbpdu] [slowprot] [802.1x] [providergvrp] [customergmrp] [customergarp] [bridgemgt] [reserved]

This parameter selects to which control frame types the command {pass | drop} applies.If no optional parameter is present, it means all control frames.

Inside the MIB, this information is mapped in a 32 bits string in which each bit (located in position 0 ... 31 with 0 being most significant bit) indicates if the frame type represented by this bit (0 ... 31) is discarded (bit=0) or passed (bit=1). Data frame have to be always passed.

Bit mapping is defined in the Table 4. on page 37.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02134/432

Page 137: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list show vlanprotprofile

Description

This command allows to get the VLAN protocol profile associated to a certain Ethernet port defined as ETS port.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following is shown an example of VLan Protocol Profile information relevant to a specific port (interface 2 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 135/432

Page 138: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list show vlanset

Description

This command allows to get the VLANs registrered on each indicated port.It also gets the VLAN for which indicated port is in the “VLAN port member set”.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02136/432

Page 139: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list show l2ctrlframe

Description

This command allows to get the L2 Control Frames management (tunneled or discarded) associated to a certain Ethernet port defined as ETS port.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following is shown an example of L2 Control Frame information relevant to a specific port (interface 2 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 137/432

Page 140: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

vlanprotprofile activate vlanprotprof_userlabel [type ethertype_value]

Description

This command allows to create and activate a VLAN protocol profile, defining its user label and optionally EtherType. If ‘ethertype_value’ is not specified, it is initiated with 0x8100 value.

Syntax Definitions

ethertype_valueA string composed of four hexadecimal characters.

vlanprotprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example have been typed two commands:

– the first is relevant to activate a specific VLan profile;– the second has been typed to report all the relevant VLan user Label information.

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02138/432

Page 141: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

vlanprotprofile delete vlanprotprof_userlabel

Description

This command allows to delete a VLAN protocol profile.

Syntax Definitions

vlanprotprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example have been typed two commands:

– the first is relevant to delete a specific VLan profile;– the second has been typed to report all the relevant VLan user Label information.

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 139/432

Page 142: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

vlanprotprofile show [vlanprof_userlabel]

Description

This command allows to get the list of all VLAN protocol profiles with the corresponding protocol type. The information can be scoped to one VLAN profile by indicating its user label.

Syntax Definitions

vlanprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example is shown an example of VLan User Label information:

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02140/432

Page 143: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

4.4 Access Control List

A summary of available commands is listed here:

acl create acl_userlabel

acl delete acl_userlabel

acl enable acl_userlabel

acl disable acl_userlabel

acl add acl_userlabel element {permit | deny} order aceorder_number macda macAddr [macdabitmask macBitMask] macsa macAddr [macsabitmask macBitMask] vlan vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] ethertype ethertype_value [-maxEthertype_value]

acl remove acl_userlabel element ace_index

acl show [acl_userlabel]

interface position naming_set_list acl bind acl_userlabel

interface position naming_set_list acl unbind

interface position naming_set_list acl show

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 141/432

Page 144: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

acl create acl_userlabel

Description

This command allows to create an Access Control List.

Syntax Definitions

acl_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02142/432

Page 145: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

acl delete acl_userlabel

Description

This command allows to delete an Access Control List with all contained elements.

Syntax Definitions

acl_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 143/432

Page 146: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

acl enable acl_userlabel

Description

This command allows to enable an already created Access Control List.

Syntax Definitions

acl_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02144/432

Page 147: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

acl disable acl_userlabel

Description

This command allows to disable an already created Access Control List.

Syntax Definitions

acl_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 145/432

Page 148: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

acl add acl_userlabel element {permit | deny} order aceorder_number macda macAddr [macdabitmask macBitMask] macsa macAddr [macsabitmask macBitMask] vlan vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] ethertype ethertype_value [-maxEthertype_value]

Description

This command allows to create an Access Control Element in an Access Control List.

Syntax Definitions

aceorder_numberAn integer value, indicating the ordering position of execution of an Access Control Element in an ACL.

macAddrA MAC address in string hex dash-separated format: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx

macBitMaskA MAC address bit mask in string hex dash-separated format:

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx (e.g. FF:FF:E0:00:00:00)

maxEthertype_valueSame syntax of ethertype_value. It indicates the upper bound of an EtherType range.

maxvlan_idSame syntax of vlan_id. It indicates the upper bound of a VLAN ID range.

ethertype_valueA string composed of four hexadecimal characters.

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

acl_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02146/432

Page 149: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

acl remove acl_userlabel element ace_index

Description

This command allows to delete an Access Control Element of an Access Control List, by indicating the corresponding Index.

Syntax Definitions

acl_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

ace_indexAn integer value, indicating an element of an ACL.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 147/432

Page 150: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

acl show [acl_userlabel]

Description

This command allows to get:

– if no ACL user label is specified, the user label and the apply change parameter of all defined ACL;

– if an ACL user label is specified, information related to all Access Control Elements of that Access Control List.

Syntax Definitions

acl_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command (without user label parameter) to get information about ACL:

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02148/432

Page 151: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list acl bind acl_userlabel

Description

This command allows to associate an ACL to/from a port.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

acl_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 149/432

Page 152: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list acl unbind

Description

This command allows to disassociate an ACL to/from a port.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02150/432

Page 153: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list acl show

Description

This command allows to show the ACL, associated to a port.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command to get information about ACL relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 151/432

Page 154: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Port Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02152/432

Page 155: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

5 Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management Commands

5.1 Classifiers

A summary of available commands is listed here:

inflowclassifier add flow_userlabel [vlan {vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] | dontcare| untagged}] [pri {pri[-maxpri] | dontcare | untagged}] [dscp {dscp[-maxdscp] | dontcare | noip}]

inflowclassifier remove classifier_id

inflowclassifier show [flow_userlabel]

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 153/432

Page 156: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

inflowclassifier add flow_userlabel [vlan {vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] | dontcare| untagged}] [pri {pri[-maxpri] | dontcare | untagged}] [dscp {dscp[-maxdscp] | dontcare | noip}]

Description

This command allows to create, configure and activate an ETS InFlow classifier.Configuration concerns the VLAN ID, the PRI and the IP DSCP specific value/range.

When either VLAN, PRI or DSCP parameter is absent, it is set to ‘dontcare’. When the optional maximum value for either VLAN, PRI or DSCP is absent, the corresponding SNMP attribute is set to 0.

Note that this command is used for adding classifiers to the first one that is defined when an ETS InFlow is created.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

maxvlan_idSame syntax of vlan_id. It indicates the upper bound of a VLAN ID range.

priAn integer value in the range [0 ... 7], indicating the Priority (or the lower bound of a PRI range).

maxpriSame syntax of pri. It indicates the upper bound of a PRI range.

dscpAn integer value in the set [0 ... 63], indicating the DSCP value (or the lower bound of a DSCP range).

maxdscpSame syntax of dscp. It indicates the upper bound of a DSCP range.

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02154/432

Page 157: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Example

In the following example have been typed two commands:

– the first is relevant to add an ETS InFlow Classifier ;– the second has been typed to report all the relevant ETS InFlow Classifier information.

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 155/432

Page 158: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

inflowclassifier remove classifier_id

Description

This command allows to delete an ETS InFlow classifier.

This command allows to delete only classifiers added by previous command. It cannot delete the classifier that is defined when a flow is created.

Syntax Definitions

classifier_idAn integer number, indicating the specific ETS InFlow classifier.

Example

In the following example have been typed two commands:

– the first is relevant to remove a specific ETS InFlow Classifier;– the second has been typed to report all the relevant ETS InFlow Classifier information

updated.

In the following example is shown the situation before third ‘classifier_id’ removing:

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02156/432

Page 159: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 157/432

Page 160: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

inflowclassifier show [flow_userlabel]

Description

This command allows to get information for each defined classifier (also including classifier index). The information can be scoped to classifiers for a certain ETS InFlow by indicating the flow user label.

Syntax Definitions

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example is shown the report of all ETS InFlow Classifier information:

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02158/432

Page 161: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

5.2 Color Profile

A summary of available commands is listed here:

colorprofile activate colorprof_userlabel {pri {allg | ally | pri_set} | dscp {default | allg | ally | dscp_set}}

colorprofile delete colorprof_userlabel

colorprofile show [colorprof_userlabel]

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 159/432

Page 162: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

colorprofile activate colorprof_userlabel {pri {allg | ally | pri_set} | dscp {default | allg | ally | dscp_set}}

Description

This command allows to create, configure and activate a Color Profile. Each Color Profile considers either PRI or DSCP values, and associates to each of them a drop precedence (green or yellow).

The command allows different options:

– ‘allg’ (all values are associated to green);– ‘ally’ (all values are associated to yellow);– DSCP default (the default association scheme as defined in the relevant Alcatel-Lucent 1850

TSS-320 CT Operations Guide is used);– ‘pri_set’ (the specified PRI values are associated to green, assuming the others associated

to yellow);– ‘dscp_set’ (the specified DSCP values are associated to green, assuming the others

associated to yellow).

Syntax Definitions

dscp_setAn expression using integer values in the range [0 ... 63], and specific symbols for representing set of DSCP value ranges which are associated to “green” in that color profile.For instance, 12-15&55 means that the DSCP values 12, 13, 14, 15 and 55 are associated to “green” in that color profile.

pri_setAn expression using integer values in the range [0 ... 7], and specific symbols for representing a set of PRI value ranges which are associated to green in that color profile.For instance 0-3&5 means that the PRI values 0, 1, 2, 3 and 5 are associated to green in that color profile.

colorprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example is shown the activation and configuration of a Color Profile:

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02160/432

Page 163: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

colorprofile delete colorprof_userlabel

Description

This command allows to delete a Color Profile.

Syntax Definitions

colorprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example have been typed two commands:

– the first is relevant to delete a specific Color Profile;– the second has been typed to report all the relevant Color Profile updated.

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 161/432

Page 164: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

colorprofile show [colorprof_userlabel]

Description

This command allows to get the list of color profiles with their drop precedence information.The information can be scoped to one color profile by indicating its user label.

Syntax Definitions

colorprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example is shown the information about a specific Color Profile:

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02162/432

Page 165: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

5.3 Traffic Descriptor

A summary of available commands is listed here:

trafficdescriptor activate trafficdescriptor_userlabel traffictype {be | reg | gua | group} cir cir_value {pir pir_value | eir eir_value} cbs cbs_value {pbs pbs_value | ebs ebs_value}

trafficdescriptor delete trafficdescriptor_userlabel

trafficdescriptor show [trafficdescriptor_userlabel]

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 163/432

Page 166: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

trafficdescriptor activate trafficdescriptor_userlabel traffictype {be | reg | gua | group} cir cir_value {pir pir_value | eir eir_value} cbs cbs_value {pbs pbs_value | ebs ebs_value}

Description

This command allows to create, activate and configure an ETS traffic descriptor.

It is possible specifying the parameters according to IETF (i.e. considering PIR and PBS) or MEF (i.e. considering EIR and EBS).Note that, in both cases, the SNMP parameters are set according to IETF definition, using the relations: PIR=CIR+EIR, PBS=CBS+EBS.

Syntax Definitions

trafficdescriptor_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

cbs_valueAn integer number, in the range [0 ... 64 MB] with 1 byte granularity.

cir_valueAn integer number, in the range [3 kbit/s ... port line rate] with 1 kbit/s granularity.

ebs_valueAn integer number, in the range [0-min [64MB, 256 * corresponding_CBS]] with 1 byte granularity.

eir_valueAn integer number, in the range [3 kbit/s ... port line rate] with 1 kbit/s granularity.

pbs_valueAn integer number, in the range [0-min [64 MB, 256 * corresponding_CBS]] with 1 byte granularity.

pir_valueAn integer number, in the range [3 kbit/s ... port line rate] with 1 kbit/s granularity.

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02164/432

Page 167: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Example

In the following example is shown the activation and configuration of a Traffic Descriptor:

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 165/432

Page 168: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

trafficdescriptor delete trafficdescriptor_userlabel

Description

This command allows to delete an ETS traffic descriptor.

Syntax Definitions

trafficdescriptor_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example is shown the deletion of a specific Traffic Descriptor:

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02166/432

Page 169: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

trafficdescriptor show [trafficdescriptor_userlabel]

Description

This command allows to get the following information for an ETS traffic descriptor:

– traffic type– traffic parameters– status

Syntax Definitions

trafficdescriptor_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example is shown the information about all Traffic descriptor activated:

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 167/432

Page 170: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

5.4 Flow Group management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

flowgroup activate flowgroup_userlabel port naming trafficdescriptor trafficdescriptor_userlabel policingmode {c-blind | ietfc-aware | mefc-aware-cf0 | mefc-aware-cf1 | disabled} [colorprofile colorprof_userlabel]

flowgroup delete flowgroup_userlabel

flowgroup show [flowgroup_userlabel]

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02168/432

Page 171: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

flowgroup activate flowgroup_userlabel port naming trafficdescriptor trafficdescriptor_userlabel policingmode {c-blind | ietfc-aware | mefc-aware-cf0 | mefc-aware-cf1 | disabled} [colorprofile colorprof_userlabel]

Description

This command allows to create, configure and activate an ETS Flow Group (InFlow/OutFlow).Configuration concerns:

– traffic descriptor association to the ETS InFlow– policing management for the ETS InFlow; it can be anyone in the following set:

• color blind• IETF coloraware• MEF color-aware without coupling flag• MEF color-aware with coupling flag• disabled

– color profile association to the ETS InFlow; if this parameter is absent, a color profile with drop precedence=green for any priority/dscp is associated by default to the ETS InFlow.

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

flowgroup_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

trafficdescriptor_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 169/432

Page 172: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

colorprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02170/432

Page 173: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

flowgroup delete flowgroup_userlabel

Description

This command allows to delete an ETS flow group.

Syntax Definitions

flowgroup_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 171/432

Page 174: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

flowgroup show [flowgroup_userlabel]

Description

This command allows to get the information about ETS flow groups. The information can be scoped to a single ETS Flow Group by specifying its userlabel.

Syntax Definitions

flowgroup_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02172/432

Page 175: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

6 MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port QOS Management Commands

6.1 Generic Configuration

A summary of available commands is listed here:

bridge type {mac | virtual | provider}

bridge show type

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 173/432

Page 176: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridge type {mac | virtual | provider}

Description

This command allows to configure the bridge type which is performed by the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example have been typed two commands:

– the first is relevant to the bridge type configuration;– the second shows the type of bridge configured for the NE.

In the following example is shown the answer from the equipment for a configuration already present:

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02174/432

Page 177: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridge show type

Description

This command allows to get the bridge type which is performed by the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown the bridge type performed:

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 175/432

Page 178: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

6.2 VLAN Registration Entry management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

bridge vlan activate vlan_set [portset naming_set_list#1 [u] [naming_set_list#2 [u] naming_set_list#n [u]]]

bridge vlan delete vlan_set

bridge vlan add vlan_set portset naming_set_list#1 [u] [naming_set_list#2 [u] naming_set_list#n [u]]

bridge vlan remove vlan_set portset naming_set_list#1 [u] [naming_set_list#2 [u] naming_set_list#n [u]]

bridge vlan show [vlan_set]

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02176/432

Page 179: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridge vlan activate vlan_set [portset naming_set_list#1 [u] [naming_set_list#2 [u] naming_set_list#n [u]]]

Description

This command allows to create a static VLAN registration entry in a Virtual bridge or a S-VLAN registration entry in a Provider bridge.

It specifies VID, VLAN Port Member Set and VLAN Port Untagged Set. All entered ports are added to the VLAN Port Member Set. When ‘u’ keyword is specified for a port entry, it is added ALSO to the corresponding VLAN Port Untagged Set.

When the port set optional parameter is absent, the VLAN port member set results empty.

A static VLAN registration entry for VID=1 is automatically created: all virtual bridge ports are in VID=1 VLAN Port Member Set and VLAN Port Untagged Set.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

In the following example have been typed two commands:

– the first is relevant to a VLAN activation;– the second shows information about all VLANs configured for the equipment.

(examples in the next page)

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 177/432

Page 180: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

In the following example have been typed two commands:

– the first shows a specific VLAN (2000) configuration associated to a specific port (interface 2 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6);

– the second shows information about all VLANs configured for the equipment.

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02178/432

Page 181: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridge vlan delete vlan_set

Description

This command allows to delete a static VLAN or S-VLAN registration entry specifying its VLAN ID. This command triggers both the flushing of IVL dynamic entries in the filtering database for that VID and the removal of IVL static entries defined for that VID.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

In the following example is shown a deletion of a specific VLAN (1000):

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 179/432

Page 182: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridge vlan add vlan_set portset naming_set_list#1 [u] [naming_set_list#2 [u] naming_set_list#n [u]]

Description

This command allow to add ports to VLAN Port Member Set and/or VLAN Port Untagged Set for a static VLAN or S-VLAN registration entry:

– if ‘u’ is not specified for a port entry, it is added ONLY to VLAN Port Member Set;– if ‘u’ is specified for a port entry, it is added to VLAN Port Member Set and VLAN Port Untagged

Set.

Note: in case a port is already in VLAN Port Member Set, it is added only to VLAN Port Untagged Set.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

In the following examples are shown:

– in the first a command to add specific ports (interface 3, 4 and 5 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6) to a specific VLAN (2000);

– in the second information about that specific VLAN (2000).

(examples in the next page)

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02180/432

Page 183: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 181/432

Page 184: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridge vlan remove vlan_set portset naming_set_list#1 [u] [naming_set_list#2 [u] naming_set_list#n [u]]

Description

This command allow to remove ports from VLAN Port Member Set and/or VLAN Port Untagged Set for a static VLAN or S-VLAN registration entry:

– if ‘u’ is not specified for a port entry, it is removed ONLY from VLAN Port Untagged Set;– if ‘u’ is specified for a port entry, it is removed from VLAN Port Member Set and VLAN Port

Untagged Set.

This command, for each port being removed from VLAN port member set, must trigger both the removal of IVL static entries defined for that <port, VID> and the flushing of IVL dynamic entries in Filtering Database for <port, VID>.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

In the following example is shown a command to remove a specific port (interface 2 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6) from a specific VLAN (2000):

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02182/432

Page 185: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 183/432

Page 186: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridge vlan show [vlan_set]

Description

This command allows to get a static VLAN or S-VLAN registration entry information.

Note: the ports in VID VLAN port member set and VLAN port untagged set are indicated by their naming.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

In the following example are shown all information about a specific VLAN (1000):

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02184/432

Page 187: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

6.3 Bridge Port management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

bridge port naming_set_list config [ingressfilter {on | off}] [acceptableframetype {all | vlan-tagged}] [pvid vlan_id] [defaultpri {0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7}] [regenerationpritable 0:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 1:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 2:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 3:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 4:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 5:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 6:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 7:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7}]

bridge port naming_set_list show info [vlan vlan_set]

bridge vlanprotprofile bind vlanprotprof_userlabel

bridge vlanprotprofile default

bridge vlanprotprofile activate vlanprotprof_userlabel [type ethertype_value]

bridge vlanprotprofile delete vlanprotprof_userlabel

bridge vlanprotprofile show [vlanprotprof_userlabel]

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 185/432

Page 188: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridge port naming_set_list config [ingressfilter {on | off}] [acceptableframetype {all | vlan-tagged}] [pvid vlan_id] [defaultpri {0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7}] [regenerationpritable 0:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 1:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 2:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 3:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 4:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 5:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 6:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 7:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7}]

Description

This command allows to set:

– if ingress filtering is enabled on a Virtual/Provider (Network) bridge port (default value= enabled);

– if a Virtual/Provider (Network) bridge port accepts only VLAN-tagged frames or all frames (default value =admit all);

– the PVID of a Virtual/Provider (Network) bridge port, that is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or Priority-tagged frames received on this port (default value = 1);

– the default user priority associated to the untagged frames received on a MAC/Virtual/Provider(Network) bridge port (default value=0);

– the regeneration user table associated to Priority-tagged and Q-tagged frames received on a Virtual/Provider (Network) bridge port (default value=identity mapping).

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02186/432

Page 189: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 187/432

Page 190: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridge port naming_set_list show info [vlan vlan_set]

Description

This command allows to get information:

– for a MAC bridge port: port status, default user PRI;– for a Virtual/Provider (Network) bridge port: port status for the specified VLAN set (that must

be specified), default user PRI, regeneration user table, PVID, acceptable frame type, ingress filtering.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

In the following example are shown all information about a specific VLAN (2000) of a specific port (interface 2 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

(example in the next page)

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02188/432

Page 191: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 189/432

Page 192: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridge vlanprotprofile bind vlanprotprof_userlabel

Description

This command applies only to Provider Bridge.

It allows to associate a VLAN protocol profile to all Provider Bridge Network ports in one shot: incoming Ethernet frames, received on that Ethernet interface and matching that VLAN EtherType, are handled as S-VLAN Tagged frame.

Syntax Definitions

vlanprotprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example is shown the command relevant to specific VLAN defined by the operator (“MARIOPIO”):

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02190/432

Page 193: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridge vlanprotprofile default

Description

This command allows to associate the default VLAN protocol profile to all Provider Bridge Network ports in one shot.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown the command to associate the default VLAN protocol profile:

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 191/432

Page 194: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridge vlanprotprofile activate vlanprotprof_userlabel [type ethertype_value]

Description

This command allows to activate the VLAN protocol profile defined by the operator associated to the Provider Bridge Network ports.

Syntax Definitions

ethertype_valueA string composed of four hexadecimal characters.

vlanprotprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example is shown the command to activate a VLAN protocol profile defined by the operator (“MARIOPIO”):

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02192/432

Page 195: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridge vlanprotprofile delete vlanprotprof_userlabel

Description

This command allows to delete the VLAN protocol profile defined by the operator associated to the Provider Bridge Network ports.

Syntax Definitions

vlanprotprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example is shown the command to delete a VLAN protocol profile defined by the operator (“MARIOPIO”):

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 193/432

Page 196: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridge vlanprotprofile show [vlanprotprof_userlabel]

Description

This command allows to get the VLAN protocol profile associated to the Provider Bridge Network ports.

Syntax Definitions

vlanprotprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example is shown the command to get information about all VLAN protocol profile configured for the Network Element:

CLI Operation Guide

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02194/432

Page 197: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

7 Services Management Commands

7.1 General Flow management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

flow show

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 195/432

Page 198: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

flow show

Description

This command allows to retrieve the following information of all configured flows:

– the flow index– the flow user label– the flow type (i.e. provider bridge bidirectional, provider bridge unidirectional ingressing, pro-

vider bridge unidirectional egressing, port-to-port)

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example are shown information about all configured flows:

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02196/432

Page 199: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

7.2 ETS-to-Provider Bridge ETS bidirectional flow

A summary of available commands is listed here:

pbflowbid activate flow_userlabel port naming classificationmode {pri | dscp} inflowclassifier [vlan {vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] | dontcare| untagged}] [pri {pri[-maxpri] | dontcare | untagged}] [dscp {dscp[-maxdscp] | dontcare | noip}] trafficdescriptor trafficdescriptor_userlabel svlan vlan_id [l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}] [policingmode {c-blind | ietfc-aware | mefc-aware-cf0 | mefc-aware-cf1 | disabled}] [colorprofile colorprof_userlabel] [pop] [push cvlan vlan_id mode {colorblind | coloraware} cpri pri [cpriyellow priyellow]] [flowgroup flowgroup_userlabel]

pbflowbid config flow_userlabel l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}

pbflowbid delete flow_userlabel

pbflowbid show [flow_userlabel]

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 197/432

Page 200: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pbflowbid activate flow_userlabel port naming classificationmode {pri | dscp} inflowclassifier [vlan {vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] | dontcare| untagged}] [pri {pri[-maxpri] | dontcare | untagged}] [dscp {dscp[-maxdscp] | dontcare | noip}] trafficdescriptor trafficdescriptor_userlabel svlan vlan_id [l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}] [policingmode {c-blind | ietfc-aware | mefc-aware-cf0 | mefc-aware-cf1 | disabled}] [colorprofile colorprof_userlabel] [pop] [push cvlan vlan_id mode {colorblind | coloraware} cpri pri [cpriyellow priyellow]] [flowgroup flowgroup_userlabel]

Description

This command allows to create, configure and activate an ETS InFlow/OutFlow and the Provider Bridge ETS InFlow/OutFlow on which it is transported.The command creates also the crossconnection between them.

Configuration concerns:

• Classification mode.It is based on PRI bits or IP DSCP bits.

• Classifier definition and association. Operator can add later new classifiers for this ETS InFlow (see para. 5.1 on page 153).Operator cannot delete this first defined classifier without deleting the entire PB flow.On the contrary, operator can delete at any time the later defined classifiers.

• Traffic descriptor association to the ETS InFlow.It carries information of CoS and traffic descriptor parameters.

• SVID definition for the Provider Bridge ETS InFlow/OutFlow.

• Management of the received L2 Control Frames (tunneled or discarded) for the ETS InFlow.L2 Control Frames, configured to be discarded at the ETS flow level will be classified as not belong-ing to the ETS flow by the ETS classifier. L2 Control Frames, configured to be tunneled at the ETS flow level, will be classified as belonging to the ETS flow only if they match all the other ETS clas-sifier criteria.Since transport network is based on the Provider Bridge, the L2 control frames with MAC DA from 01-80-C2-00-00-01 to 01-80-C2-00-00-0D must be discarded, independent on operator configu-ration.If the L2 Control Frame optional parameter is absent, all L2 Control Frames (except those with MAC DA from 01-80-C2-00-00-01 to 01-80-C2-00-00-0D) are tunnelled by default.

• Policing management for the ETS InFlow.It can be either color blind, IETF color-aware, MEF color-aware without coupling flag, MEF color-aware with coupling flag or disabled. If this parameter is absent, the policing is disabled by default.

• Color profile association to the ETS InFlow.If this parameter is absent, a color profile with drop precedence=green for any priority/dscp is asso-ciated by default to the ETS InFlow.

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02198/432

Page 201: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

• VLAN pop enabling/disabling on the ETS InFlow.If this parameter is absent, pop operation is disabled by default.

• VLAN push configuration on the ETS OutFlow.It consists in enabling/disabling push operation on ETS OutFlow, configuring:

– the VID to be pushed;– the colorblind/coloraware meaning of the PRI;– the PRI to be pushed for all frames (in colorblind mode) or only for green frames (in coloraware

mode);– the PRI to be pushed for yellow frames in coloraware mode. If this parameter is absent, PRI=0

is applied by default.

If VLAN push configuration parameter is absent, push operation is disabled by default.

• ETS group to which the ETS Inflow belongs.This optional information is alternative to the traffic descriptor/policing/color profile configuration.When the ETS Inflow belongs to an ETS group (i.e. flowgroup is specified), the operator has to omit:

– Traffic descriptor (it is the BE NULL traffic descriptor)– Policing– Color profile

• ETS Crossconnection set-up.

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

maxdscpSame syntax of dscp. It indicates the upper bound of a DSCP range.

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 199/432

Page 202: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

ctrl_frame_32bitsIt identifies the control frame types for managing their passing through or discarding and it has the following syntax:

[customerbpdu] [providerbpdu] [slowprot] [802.1x] [providergvrp] [customergmrp] [customergarp] [bridgemgt] [reserved]

This parameter selects to which control frame types the command {pass | drop} applies.If no optional parameter is present, it means all control frames.

Inside the MIB, this information is mapped in a 32 bits string in which each bit (located in position 0 ... 31 with 0 being most significant bit) indicates if the frame type represented by this bit (0 ... 31) is discarded (bit=0) or passed (bit=1). Data frame have to be always passed.

Bit mapping is defined in the Table 4. on page 37.

maxpriSame syntax of pri. It indicates the upper bound of a PRI range.

maxvlan_idSame syntax of vlan_id. It indicates the upper bound of a VLAN ID range.

dscpAn integer value in the set [0 ... 63], indicating the DSCP value (or the lower bound of a DSCP range).

priAn integer value in the range [0 ... 7], indicating the Priority (or the lower bound of a PRI range).

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

flowgroup_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

trafficdescriptor_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

colorprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

priyellowAn integer value in the range [0 ... 7], indicating the Priority of the yellow frames.

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02200/432

Page 203: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 201/432

Page 204: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pbflowbid config flow_userlabel l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}

Description

This command allows to change the L2 Control Frames that should be tunneled or discarded by an already created ETS InFlow.

Since transport network is based on Provider Bridge, the L2 Control Frames with MAC DA from01-80-C2- 00-00-01 to 01-80-C2-00-00-0D must be discarded, independent on operator configuration.

Syntax Definitions

ctrl_frame_32bitsIt identifies the control frame types for managing their passing through or discarding and it has the following syntax:

[customerbpdu] [providerbpdu] [slowprot] [802.1x] [providergvrp] [customergmrp] [customergarp] [bridgemgt] [reserved]

This parameter selects to which control frame types the command {pass | drop} applies.If no optional parameter is present, it means all control frames.

Inside the MIB, this information is mapped in a 32 bits string in which each bit (located in position 0 ... 31 with 0 being most significant bit) indicates if the frame type represented by this bit (0 ... 31) is discarded (bit=0) or passed (bit=1). Data frame have to be always passed.

Bit mapping is defined in the Table 4. on page 37.

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02202/432

Page 205: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pbflowbid delete flow_userlabel

Description

This command allows to delete an ETS InFlow/OutFlow and the Provider Bridge ETS InFlow/OutFlow on which it is transported and corresponding crossconnections.

Syntax Definitions

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 203/432

Page 206: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pbflowbid show [flow_userlabel]

Description

This command allows to get the list of all defined ETS InFlow/OutFlow with the Provider Bridge ETS InFlow/OutFlow on which they are transported.

This command allows to get detailed information about a specific ETS InFlow/OutFlow and the Provider Bridge ETS InFlow/OutFlow on which it is transported, by specifying the corresponding user label.

Syntax Definitions

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02204/432

Page 207: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

7.3 ETS-to-ETS bidirectional Transparent Mapping (port-to-port configuration)

A summary of available commands is listed here:

portportbid activate flow_userlabel port1 naming port2 naming

portportbid delete flow_userlabel

portportbid show [flow_userlabel]

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 205/432

Page 208: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

portportbid activate flow_userlabel port1 naming port2 naming

Description

This command allows to create, configure and activate a port-to-port configuration: it means a local ETS InFlow/OutFlow is transparently crossconnected to an ETS InFlow/OutFlow, in such a way that all traffic incoming from one ETS is transmitted to the other one.

Configuration concerns:

– Classifier definition: default classifier is applied, i.e. dont care of VLAN, PRI or DSCP values. No other classifier can be added by operator.

– Traffic descriptor association: BE NULL traffic descriptor is applied.– Management of the received L2 Control Frames: all control frames are tunneled.– Policy management: it is disabled.– Color profile association: default color profile (drop precedence=green for any priority) is

applied.– VLAN pop enabling/disabling: it is disabled.– VLAN push configuration: it is disabled by default.– ETS crossconnection set-up.

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02206/432

Page 209: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Example

In the following example is shown the command relevant to the specific ports:

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 207/432

Page 210: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

portportbid delete flow_userlabel

Description

This command allows to delete a couple of ETS InFlow/OutFlow and the transparent connection between them.

Syntax Definitions

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example is shown the command relevant to the deletion:

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02208/432

Page 211: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

portportbid show [flow_userlabel]

Description

This command allows to get the list of ETS InFlow/OutFlow couples that are transparently connected.This command allows to get detailed information about a single couple, by specifying the corresponding flow user label.

Syntax Definitions

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example is shown the command to report the relevant information:

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 209/432

Page 212: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

7.4 ETS-to-Provider Bridge ETS ingress unidirectional flow

A summary of available commands is listed here:

pbflowinunidir activate flow_userlabel port naming classificationmode {pri | dscp} inflowclassifier [vlan {vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] | dontcare| untagged}] [pri {pri[-maxpri] | dontcare | untagged}] [dscp {dscp[-maxdscp] | dontcare | noip}] trafficdescriptor trafficdescriptor_userlabel svlan vlan_id [l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}] [policingmode {c-blind | ietfc-aware | mefc-aware-cf0 | mefc-aware-cf1 | disabled}] [colorprofile colorprof_userlabel] [pop] [flowgroup flowgroup_userlabel]

pbflowinunidir config flow_userlabel l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}

pbflowinunidir delete flow_userlabel

pbflowinunidir show [flow_userlabel]

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02210/432

Page 213: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pbflowinunidir activate flow_userlabel port naming classificationmode {pri | dscp} inflowclassifier [vlan {vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] | dontcare| untagged}] [pri {pri[-maxpri] | dontcare | untagged}] [dscp {dscp[-maxdscp] | dontcare | noip}] trafficdescriptor trafficdescriptor_userlabel svlan vlan_id [l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}] [policingmode {c-blind | ietfc-aware | mefc-aware-cf0 | mefc-aware-cf1 | disabled}] [colorprofile colorprof_userlabel] [pop] [flowgroup flowgroup_userlabel]

Description

This command allows to create, configure and activate an ETS InFlow and the Provider Bridge ETS OutFlow on which it is transported.The command creates also the crossconnection between them.

Configuration concerns:

• Classification mode.It is based on PRI bits or IP DSCP bits.

• Classifier definition and association. Operator can add later new classifiers for this ETS InFlow (see para. 5.1 on page 153).Operator cannot delete this first defined classifier without deleting the entire PB flow.On the contrary, operator can delete at any time the later defined classifiers.

• Traffic descriptor association to the ETS InFlow.It carries information of CoS and traffic descriptor parameters.

• SVID definition for the Provider Bridge ETS InFlow/OutFlow.

• Management of the received L2 Control Frames (tunneled or discarded) for the ETS InFlow.L2 Control Frames, configured to be discarded at the ETS flow level will be classified as not belong-ing to the ETS flow by the ETS classifier. L2 Control Frames, configured to be tunneled at the ETS flow level, will be classified as belonging to the ETS flow only if they match all the other ETS clas-sifier criteria.Since transport network is based on the Provider Bridge, the L2 Control Frames with MAC DA from 01-80-C2-00-00-01 to 01-80-C2-00-00-0D must be discarded, independent on operator configu-ration.If the L2 Control Frame optional parameter is absent, all L2 Control Frames (except those with MAC DA from 01-80-C2-00-00-01 to 01-80-C2-00-00-0D) are tunnelled by default.

• Policing management for the ETS InFlow.It can be either color blind, IETF color-aware, MEF color-aware without coupling flag, MEF color-aware with coupling flag or disabled. If this parameter is absent, the policing is disabled by default.

• Color profile association to the ETS InFlow.If this parameter is absent, a color profile with drop precedence=green for any priority/dscp is asso-ciated by default to the ETS InFlow.

• VLAN pop enabling/disabling on the ETS InFlow.If this parameter is absent, pop operation is disabled by default.

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 211/432

Page 214: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

• ETS group to which the ETS Inflow belongs.This optional information is alternative to the traffic descriptor/policing/color profile configuration.When the ETS Inflow belongs to an ETS group (i.e. flowgroup is specified), the operator has to omit:

– Traffic descriptor (it is the BE NULL traffic descriptor)– Policing– Color profile

• ETS Crossconnection set-up.

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

ctrl_frame_32bitsIt identifies the control frame types for managing their passing through or discarding and it has the following syntax:

[customerbpdu] [providerbpdu] [slowprot] [802.1x] [providergvrp] [customergmrp] [customergarp] [bridgemgt] [reserved]

This parameter selects to which control frame types the command {pass | drop} applies.If no optional parameter is present, it means all control frames.

Inside the MIB, this information is mapped in a 32 bits string in which each bit (located in position 0 ... 31 with 0 being most significant bit) indicates if the frame type represented by this bit (0 ... 31) is discarded (bit=0) or passed (bit=1). Data frame have to be always passed.

Bit mapping is defined in the Table 4. on page 37.

maxdscpSame syntax of dscp. It indicates the upper bound of a DSCP range.

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02212/432

Page 215: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

maxpriSame syntax of pri. It indicates the upper bound of a PRI range.

maxvlan_idSame syntax of vlan_id. It indicates the upper bound of a VLAN ID range.

dscpAn integer value in the set [0 ... 63], indicating the DSCP value (or the lower bound of a DSCP range).

priAn integer value in the range [0 ... 7], indicating the Priority (or the lower bound of a PRI range).

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

flowgroup_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

trafficdescriptor_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

colorprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 213/432

Page 216: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pbflowinunidir config flow_userlabel l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}

Description

This command allows to change the L2 Control Frames that should be tunneled or discarded by an already created ETS InFlow.

Since transport network is based on Provider Bridge, the L2 Control fFrames with MAC DA from 01-80-C2- 00-00-01 to 01-80-C2-00-00-0D must be discarded, independent on operator configuration.

Syntax Definitions

ctrl_frame_32bitsIt identifies the control frame types for managing their passing through or discarding and it has the following syntax:

[customerbpdu] [providerbpdu] [slowprot] [802.1x] [providergvrp] [customergmrp] [customergarp] [bridgemgt] [reserved]

This parameter selects to which control frame types the command {pass | drop} applies.If no optional parameter is present, it means all control frames.

Inside the MIB, this information is mapped in a 32 bits string in which each bit (located in position 0 ... 31 with 0 being most significant bit) indicates if the frame type represented by this bit (0 ... 31) is discarded (bit=0) or passed (bit=1). Data frame have to be always passed.

Bit mapping is defined in the Table 4. on page 37.

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02214/432

Page 217: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pbflowinunidir delete flow_userlabel

Description

This command allows to delete an ETS InFlow and the Provider Bridge ETS OutFlow on which it is transported and corresponding crossconnection.

Syntax Definitions

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 215/432

Page 218: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pbflowinunidir show [flow_userlabel]

Description

This command allows to get the list of all defined ETS InFlow with the Provider Bridge ETS OutFlow on which they are transported.

This command allows to get detailed information about a specific ETS InFlow and Provider Bridge ETS OutFlow on which it is transported, by specifying the corresponding user label.

Syntax Definitions

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02216/432

Page 219: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

7.5 ETS-to-Provider Bridge ETS egress unidirectional flow

A summary of available commands is listed here:

pbflowoutunidir activate flow_userlabel port naming svlan vlan_id [push cvlan vlan_id mode {colorblind | coloraware} cpri pri [cpriyellow priyellow]]

pbflowoutunidir delete flow_userlabel

pbflowoutunidir show [flow_userlabel]

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 217/432

Page 220: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pbflowoutunidir activate flow_userlabel port naming svlan vlan_id [push cvlan vlan_id mode {colorblind | coloraware} cpri pri [cpriyellow priyellow]]

Description

This command allows to create, configure and activate an ETS OutFlow and the Provider Bridge ETS InFlow on which it is transported.The command creates also the crossconnection between them.

Configuration concerns:

– SVID definition for the Provider Bridge ETS InFlow/OutFlow.

– VLAN push configuration on the ETS OutFlow. It consists in enabling/disabling push operation on ETS OutFlow, configuring:

• the VID to be pushed;• the colorblind/coloraware meaning of the PRI;• the PRI to be pushed for all frames (in colorblind mode) or only for green frames (in col-

oraware mode);• the PRI to be pushed for yellow frames in coloraware mode; if this parameter is absent,

PRI=0 is applied by default.

If VLAN push configuration parameter is absent, push operation is disabled by default.

– ETS Crossconnection set-up.

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02218/432

Page 221: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

priAn integer value in the range [0 ... 7], indicating the Priority (or the lower bound of a PRI range).

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

priyellowAn integer value in the range [0 ... 7], indicating the Priority of the yellow frames.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 219/432

Page 222: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pbflowoutunidir delete flow_userlabel

Description

This command allows to delete an ETS OutFlow and the Provider Bridge ETS InFlow on which it is transported and corresponding crossconnection.

Syntax Definitions

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02220/432

Page 223: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pbflowoutunidir show [flow_userlabel]

Description

This command allows to get the list of all defined ETS OutFlow with the Provider Bridge ETS InFlow on which they are transported.

This command allows to get detailed information about a specific ETS OutFlow and the Provider Bridge ETS OutFlow on which it is transported, by specifying the corresponding user label.

Syntax Definitions

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 221/432

Page 224: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

7.6 Dual Homing management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

cbpdu activate flow_userlabel port naming svlan vlan_id

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02222/432

Page 225: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

cbpdu activate flow_userlabel port naming svlan vlan_id

Description

This command allows to to create, configure and activate an ETS InFlow/OutFlow, which selectively classifies the untagged customer STP/RSTP/MSTP BPDU, the Provider Bridge ETS InFlow/OutFlow associated to an already registered SVLAN, on which classified frames will be transported.

This command creates also the crossconnection between corresponding Inflow and Outflow.

Configuration concerns:

– Classification: the classifier takes the incoming untagged frames.The classification process is completed by the ETS Inflow L2 CTRL frame configuration (described below). The user cannot add classifiers to such inflow.

– Traffic descriptor association to the ETS InFlow.It carries information of CoS and traffic descriptor parameters. They are filled with fixed values: guaranteed COS and minimum vales of CIR and PIR (i.e. 3 Kbit/s).

– SVID definition for the Provider Bridge ETS InFlow/OutFlow.This SVID is in charge to carry the C-BPDU through the service provider network between the service provider nodes that face the customer network.

– Management of the received L2 control frames (tunneled or discarded) for the ETS InFlowC-BPDU must be tunneled. All other L2 control frames must be discarded.Also data frames (represented by bit 0 of the L2CTRL 32bit string) must be discarded.

– Policing management for the ETS InFlow. It is disabled.– Color profile association to the ETS InFlow. A color profile with drop precedence=”green” for

any priority/dscp is associated to the ETS InFlow. – VLAN pop enabling/disabling on the ETS InFlow. The pop operation is disabled.– VLAN push configuration on the ETS OutFlow. The push operation is disabled.– ETS group to which the ETS Inflow belongs. No flow group is allowed.– ETS Crossconnection set-up.

Syntax Definitions

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 223/432

Page 226: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Services Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02224/432

Page 227: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

8 Ethernet Switch Management Commands

8.1 General Filtering Database parameters

A summary of available commands is listed here:

bridgedbfiltering agetime filterDbAgeTime_value

bridgedbfiltering show agetime

bridgedbfiltering show overloads

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Switch Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 225/432

Page 228: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridgedbfiltering agetime filterDbAgeTime_value

Description

This command allows to set the filtering database Aging Time.

Syntax Definitions

filterDbAgeTime_valueA value in the set [280sec (default), 70min, 210min, 14h, 56h] indicating the filtering database Aging Time (see relevant Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 CT Operations Guide).

Example

In the following example have been typed two commands:

– the first is relevant to the Aging Time setting;– the second shows the value of the Aging Time set (in seconds).

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Switch Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02226/432

Page 229: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridgedbfiltering show agetime

Description

This command allows to get the filtering database Aging Time.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown the command to get the value of the Aging Time provisioned (value in seconds):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Switch Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 227/432

Page 230: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridgedbfiltering show overloads

Description

This command allows to get the filtering database overloads.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown the command to get information about the the filtering database overloads:

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Switch Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02228/432

Page 231: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

8.2 Filtering Database Entries management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

bridgedbfiltering delete mac macAddr [vlan vlan_id] [portin naming]

bridgedbfiltering activate mac macAddr [vlan vlan_id] [portin naming] [portout naming_set_list]

bridgedbfiltering show unicast-static [mac macAddr] [vlan vlan_id]

bridgedbfiltering show multicast-static [mac macAddr] [vlan vlan_id]

bridgedbfiltering show multicast-dynamic [mac macAddr] [vlan vlan_id]

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Switch Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 229/432

Page 232: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridgedbfiltering delete mac macAddr [vlan vlan_id] [portin naming]

Description

This command allows to delete:

– unicast dynamic filtering entry– unicast static filtering entry– multicast static filtering entry

If VLAN parameter is not specified, it refers to VID=1.

If inbound bridge port parameter is not specified, the default value is any inbound port (of that VLAN).Inbound bridge port information is useless for unicast dynamic entries.

The deletion operation applies to different MIB tables depending on the entry required to be deleted is Multicast Static, Unicast Static or Unicast dynamic.

It is possible to recognize if the entry is Multicast or Unicast, by looking at the least significant bit of the most significant byte of the MAC address (if=1 multicast, otherwise Unicast).

If it is as Unicast entry, the NE tries to delete this entry in the static unicast entry table; if the operation is rejected, the NE tries to delete this entry in the dynamic unicast entry table; if the operation is rejected, the entry had not been previously registered.

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Switch Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02230/432

Page 233: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

macAddrA MAC address in string hex dash-separated format: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx

Example

In the following example has been typed a command to delete all bridge filtering parameters for a specific VLAN (1) configuration associated to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Switch Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 231/432

Page 234: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridgedbfiltering activate mac macAddr [vlan vlan_id] [portin naming] [portout naming_set_list]

Description

This command allows to create a unicast/multicast static filtering entry in Filtering Database consisting of below items:

– Inbound bridge port. If the inbound bridge port parameter is not specified, the default value is any inbound port (of that VLAN).

– The set of allowed outbound bridge ports, i.e. the set of ports to which frames, received from the inbound port and addressed to a specific <[VLAN], MAC address>, are to be forwarded. If no outbound port is specified, then it is forwarded to all ports (of that VLAN).

– VLAN. If VLAN parameter is not specified, it refers to VID=1.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Switch Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02232/432

Page 235: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

macAddrA MAC address in string hex dash-separated format: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx

Example

In the following example has been typed a command to activate all bridge filtering parameters for a specific VLAN (1) configuration associated to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6) relevant to a MAC address:

In the following example has been typed a command to activate all bridge filtering parameters for a specific VLAN (1) configuration associated to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6) relevant to another MAC address:

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Switch Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 233/432

Page 236: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridgedbfiltering show unicast-static [mac macAddr] [vlan vlan_id]

Description

This command allows to get the following information about the unicast static filtering entries in Filtering Database:

– MAC Address.– Inbound bridge port with one of below possible values: ‘All inbound ports’ or ‘A specific bridge

port’.– The set of allowed outbound bridge ports, i.e. the set of ports to which frames, received from

inbound port and addressed to a specific <[VLAN], MAC address>, are to be forwarded.

If MAC Address parameter is not specified, it refers to any unicast static MAC address. If VLAN parameter is not specified, it refers to any VID.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

macAddrA MAC address in string hex dash-separated format: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx

Example

In the following example are shown all parameters relevant to unicast-static configuration for all VLANs and ports (in the example only one is shown):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Switch Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02234/432

Page 237: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridgedbfiltering show multicast-static [mac macAddr] [vlan vlan_id]

Description

This command allows to get the following information about the multicast static MAC Addresses registered in the filtering database:

– MAC Address.– Inbound bridge port with one of below possible values: ‘All inbound ports’ or ‘A specific bridge

port’.– The set of allowed outbound bridge ports, i.e. the set of ports to which frames, received from

inbound port and addressed to a specific <[VLAN], MAC address>, are to be forwarded.

If MAC DA parameter is not specified, it refers to any MAC DA multicast static. If VLAN parameter is not specified, it refers to any VID.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

macAddrA MAC address in string hex dash-separated format: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx

Example

In the following example are shown all parameters relevant to multicast-static configuration for all VLANs and ports (in the example only one is shown):

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Switch Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 235/432

Page 238: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridgedbfiltering show multicast-dynamic [mac macAddr] [vlan vlan_id]

Description

This command allows to get the following information about the multicast MAC Addresses registered dynamically by a Group Address Registration Protocol in the filtering database:

– MAC Address;– the set of allowed outbound bridge ports, i.e. the set of ports to which frames, received from

any inbound port and addressed to a specific <[VLAN], MAC address>, are to be forwarded.

If MAC address parameter is not specified, it refers to any MAC address multicast dynamic. If VLAN parameter is not specified, it refers to any VID.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

macAddrA MAC address in string hex dash-separated format: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Ethernet Switch Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02236/432

Page 239: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

9 Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

A summary of available commands is listed here:

stp enable {stp | rstp | pervlanrstp | mstp}

stp disable

stp show type

stp config [vlan vlan_set] [pri bridge_pri] [maxage bridge_max_age] [hellotime bridge_hello_time] [fwddelay bridge_forward_delay]

stp show info [vlan vlan_set]

stp port naming_set_list config [vlan vlan_set] [pri port_pri] [pathcost port_path_cost] [forcestate {dynamic | blocked | forwarding}] [adminxctype {edge | ptp | noptp | auto}]

stp port naming_set_list show info [vlan vlan_set]

mstp cist config [pri bridge_pri] [maxage bridge_max_age] [hellotime bridge_hello_time] [fwddelay bridge_forward_delay]

mstp cist show info

mstp msti mstp_instance_set activate

mstp msti mstp_instance_set delete

mstp msti mstp_instance_set config [pri bridge_pri]

mstp msti mstp_instance_set show info

mstp msti mstp_instance vlan vlan_set

mstp show msti [vlan vlan_set]

mstp show vlan [msti mstp_instance_set]

mstp cist port naming_set_list config [forcestate {dynamic | blocked | forwarding}] [adminxctype {edge | ptp | noptp | auto}] [pri port_pri] [pathcost port_path_cost]

mstp cist port naming_set_list show info

mstp msti mstp_instance_set port naming_set_list config [forcestate {dynamic | blocked | forwarding}] [pri port_pri] [pathcost port_path_cost]

mstp msti mstp_instance_set port naming_set_list show info

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 237/432

Page 240: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

stp enable {stp | rstp | pervlanrstp | mstp}

Description

This command allows to enable a Spanning Tree Protocol type per node.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following are shown three examples:

– the first shows the STP enabling as STP type and the relevant command that shows the type of STP provided for the node;

– the second shows the STP enabling as RSTP type;– the third shows the STP enabling as per-VLAN RSTP type.

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02238/432

Page 241: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

stp disable

Description

This command allows to disable the currently active Spanning Tree Protocol per node.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following are shown two examples:

– the first shows the STP disabling;– the second shows the relevant command that shows the status of STP provided for the node.

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 239/432

Page 242: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

stp show type

Description

This command allows to get if and which type of Spanning Tree Protocol is active per node.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown information about the STP type provided for the node:

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02240/432

Page 243: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

stp config [vlan vlan_set] [pri bridge_pri] [maxage bridge_max_age] [hellotime bridge_hello_time] [fwddelay bridge_forward_delay]

Description

This command allows to change the following Spanning Tree Protocol information per node.

For STP, RSTP, per-VLAN RSTP:

– Bridge Identifier Priority– Bridge Max Age– Bridge Hello Time– Bridge Forward Delay

When an optional value is absent, the corresponding currently configured value is not changed.

This command:

– does not apply to MSTP;– must have VLAN parameter in case of per-VLAN RSTP, while it must not in case of STP,

RSTP.

So, when this command is entered, the NE has to retrieve the currently configured STP Type and, if the checks above are not verified, to reject the command informing significantly the operator.This policy is valid for all commands in the STP context.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

bridge_forward_delayThe Bridge Forward Delay used by STP to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding; an integer value, measured in 0.01seconds, in the range [400 ... 3000] with default value=1500.

bridge_hello_timeThe interval between periodic transmissions of Configuration Message by Designated Ports; an integer value, measured in 0.01seconds, in the range [100 ... 200] with default value=200.

bridge_max_ageThe maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge; an integer value, measured in 0.01seconds, in the range [600 ... 4000] with default value=2000.

bridge_priWritable portion of the bridge identifier (the first 2 byte of 8 byte); an integer value in the range [0 ... 61440] with granularity 4096 and default value=32768.

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 241/432

Page 244: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Example

In the following are shown two examples:

– the first shows the STP configuration (all parameters except VLAN parameter);– the second shows the relevant command that shows all information provided for the STP pro-

vided for the node.

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02242/432

Page 245: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

stp show info [vlan vlan_set]

Description

This command allows to get the following Spanning Tree Protocol information per node.

For STP, RSTP, per-VLAN RSTP:

– Bridge Identifier– Time Since Topology Change: the time since the last time a topology change was detected

by the spanning tree protocol.– Topology Change Count: the total number of topology changes detected by this bridge since

reset or initialization.– Designated Root: the Bridge Identifier of the root of the spanning tree as determined by the

protocol of this bridge. This value is used as the Root Identifier parameter in all Configuration BPDU originated by this node.

– Root Path Cost– Root Port– Max Age– Hello Time– Forward Delay– Bridge Max Age– Bridge Hello Time– Bridge Forward Delay

For STP:

– Hold Time: the hold time is the interval length during which no more than two BDPU shall be transmitted by the STP, in units of hundredths of a second.

For RSTP, per-VLAN RSTP:

– Next Best Root Cost: the cost of the path to the root through the next best root port of this bridge.

– Next Best Root Port Number: the port number of the next port which provides the lowest cost path from this bridge to the root bridge for this bridge. This port will become root port if the actual root port goes down.

– Transmit Hold Count

For per-VLAN RSTP:

– VLAN number

Syntax Definitions

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 243/432

Page 246: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

In the following example are shown information about STP provided for the node:

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02244/432

Page 247: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

stp port naming_set_list config [vlan vlan_set] [pri port_pri] [pathcost port_path_cost] [forcestate {dynamic | blocked | forwarding}] [adminxctype {edge | ptp | noptp | auto}]

Description

This command allows to change the following Spanning Tree Protocol information per port.

For STP, RSTP, per-VLAN RSTP:

– Port Identifier Priority– Port Path Cost– Force Port State

For RSTP, per-VLAN RSTP:

– Administrative Connection Type

When an optional value is absent, the corresponding currently configured value is not changed.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

port_path_costThe port path cost. Its value depends on the link speed of the port (e.g. if the link speed of the port is Mbit/s, port_path_cost= an integer value in the range [1 ... 200 000 000] and default value=20 000 000.

port_priWritable portion of the port identifier (the first 4 bit of 2 byte). An integer value in the range [0 ... 240] with granularity 16 and default value=128.

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 245/432

Page 248: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Example

In the following are shown two examples:

– the first shows the STP configuration (all parameters except VLAN parameter) for a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6), where the PRI value is set to 3;

– the first shows the STP configuration (all parameters except VLAN parameter) for a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6), where the PRI value is set to 0.

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02246/432

Page 249: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

stp port naming_set_list show info [vlan vlan_set]

Description

This command allows to get the following Spanning Tree Protocol information per port:

For STP, RSTP, per-VLAN RSTP:

– Port State: the current control plane state of the port.

• for STP, the possible values are: disabled, blocking, listening, learning and forwarding;• for RSTP, the possible values are: disabled, learning and forwarding.

– Port Identifier: the unique Port Identifier consisting of Port Number and Port Priority.– Port Role.– Port Path Cost.– Port Designated Root: the unique Bridge Identifier of the Bridge recorded as the Root, in the

Configuration BPDUs transmitted by the Designated Bridge for the segment to which the port is attached.

– Port Designated Cost: the path cost of the Designated Port of the segment connected to this port.

– Port Designated Bridge: the Bridge Identifier of the bridge, which this port considers to be the Designated Bridge for this ports segment.

– Port Designated Port Identifier: the Port Identifier of the port on the Designated Bridge for this ports segment.

– Port Forward Transitions: the number of times the control plane port state of this port has tran-sitioned from the learning state to the forwarding state.

– Force Port State: the force control plane port state in charge of disable/enable spanning tree protocol for a specific port. If it is enabled for a specific port, the control plane port state is set by the protocol; if it is disabled, the control plane port state can be set by manager. The pos-sible values are: dynamic, blocked, and forwarding.

For RSTP, per-VLAN RSTP:

– AdminConnectionType: the administrative port's connection type. The possible values are: edge port, point-to-point, not-point-to-point, automatically determined by bridge.

– OperConnectionType: the operational port's connection type. The possible values are the same as AdminConnectionType.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 247/432

Page 250: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example are shown information about STP provided for the node relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02248/432

Page 251: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

mstp cist config [pri bridge_pri] [maxage bridge_max_age] [hellotime bridge_hello_time] [fwddelay bridge_forward_delay]

Description

This command allows to change the following CIST information per node:

– Bridge Identifier Priority– Bridge Max Age– Bridge Hello Time– Bridge Forward Delay

When an optional value is absent, the corresponding currently configured value is not changed.

Syntax Definitions

bridge_forward_delayThe Bridge Forward Delay used by STP to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding; an integer value, measured in 0.01seconds, in the range [400 ... 3000] with default value=1500.

bridge_hello_timeThe interval between periodic transmissions of Configuration Message by Designated Ports; an integer value, measured in 0.01seconds, in the range [100 ... 200] with default value=200.

bridge_max_ageThe maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge; an integer value, measured in 0.01seconds, in the range [600 ... 4000] with default value=2000.

bridge_priWritable portion of the bridge identifier (the first 2 byte of 8 byte); an integer value in the range [0 ... 61440] with granularity 4096 and default value=32768.

Example

In the following are shown three examples:

– the first shows the MSTP CIST configuration, without parameters;– the second shows the MSTP CIST configuration, with a superabundant parameter (PRI); in

this case the equipment provides to arrange this configuration parameter;– the third shows the MSTP CIST configuration, with typical parameters; it is also shown the rel-

evant information.

(examples in the next page)

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 249/432

Page 252: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02250/432

Page 253: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

mstp cist show info

Description

This command allows to get the following CIST information per node:

– Bridge Identifier– Time Since Topology Change– Topology Change Count– Designated Root– Root Path Cost– Root Port– Max Age– Hello Time– Forward Delay– Bridge Max Age– Bridge Hello Time– Bridge Forward Delay– Next Best Root Cost– Next Best Root Port Number– Transmit Hold Count

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example are shown information about MSTP CIST provided for the node:

(example in the next page)

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 251/432

Page 254: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02252/432

Page 255: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

mstp msti mstp_instance_set activate

Description

This command allows to create a MSTI.

Syntax Definitions

mstp_instance_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 63] and specific symbols for representing a set of MSTP instance value ranges. For instance 1-3&21 means that the values 1, 2, 3 and 21 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command to create a MSTI, with a specific range:

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 253/432

Page 256: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

mstp msti mstp_instance_set delete

Description

This command allows to delete a MSTI.

Syntax Definitions

mstp_instance_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 63] and specific symbols for representing a set of MSTP instance value ranges. For instance 1-3&21 means that the values 1, 2, 3 and 21 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command to delete a specific MSTI:

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02254/432

Page 257: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

mstp msti mstp_instance_set config [pri bridge_pri]

Description

This command allows to change the Bridge Identifier Priority of the MSTI one-instance per node (when STP Type = MSTP).

Syntax Definitions

bridge_priWritable portion of the bridge identifier (the first 2 byte of 8 byte); an integer value in the range [0 ... 61440] with granularity 4096 and default value=32768.

mstp_instance_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 63] and specific symbols for representing a set of MSTP instance value ranges. For instance 1-3&21 means that the values 1, 2, 3 and 21 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command to configure a MSTI, with a specific range and bridge priority (PRI):

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 255/432

Page 258: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

mstp msti mstp_instance_set show info

Description

This command allows to get the following MSTI information per node:

– Bridge Identifier– Time Since Topology Change– Topology Change Count– Designated Root– Root Path Cost– Root Port

Syntax Definitions

mstp_instance_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 63] and specific symbols for representing a set of MSTP instance value ranges. For instance 1-3&21 means that the values 1, 2, 3 and 21 are specified.

Example

In the following example are shown information about MSTP MSTI relevant to a specific range (three of ten are shown, 10-11-20):

(example in the next page)

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02256/432

Page 259: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 257/432

Page 260: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

mstp msti mstp_instance vlan vlan_set

Description

This command changes the MSTID assigned to one or more specific VIDs.By default, all VIDs are allocated to CIST (MSTID = 0). This command is valid only for IVL Bridge.

Syntax Definitions

mstp_instanceThe MSTP instance identifier. An integer value in the range [1 ... 63].

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command to change for a specific MSTI (12) a specific VLAN identification:

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02258/432

Page 261: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

mstp show msti [vlan vlan_set]

Description

This command allows to get the MSTID assigned to each created VLAN. This command can be scoped to a specific VID.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

In the following example are shown information about MSTP MSTI relevant to a specific range of VLAN identification:

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 259/432

Page 262: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

mstp show vlan [msti mstp_instance_set]

Description

This command allows to get the VLANs to which each created MSTI is assigned. This command can be scoped to a specific MSTI.

Syntax Definitions

mstp_instance_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 63] and specific symbols for representing a set of MSTP instance value ranges. For instance 1-3&21 means that the values 1, 2, 3 and 21 are specified.

Example

In the following are shown two examples:

– in the first are shown information about MSTP MSTI configured, relevant to all VLANs;– in the second (see next page) are shown information about the MSTP MSTI range configured.

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02260/432

Page 263: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 261/432

Page 264: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

mstp cist port naming_set_list config [forcestate {dynamic | blocked | forwarding}] [adminxctype {edge | ptp | noptp | auto}] [pri port_pri] [pathcost port_path_cost]

Description

This command allows to change the following CIST information per port:

– Force Port State– Administrative Connection Type– Port Identifier Priority– Port Path Cost

When an optional value is absent, the corresponding currently configured value is not changed.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

port_path_costThe port path cost. Its value depends on the link speed of the port (e.g. if the link speed of the port is Mbit/s, port_path_cost= an integer value in the range [1 ... 200 000 000] and default value=20 000 000.

port_priWritable portion of the port identifier (the first 4 bit of 2 byte). An integer value in the range [0 ... 240] with granularity 16 and default value=128.

Example

In the following example has been typed the command to change for a specific port several CIST parameters:

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02262/432

Page 265: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

mstp cist port naming_set_list show info

Description

This command allows to get the following CIST information per port:

– CIST Port State: the current control plane state of the port. The possible values are: disabled, learning and forwarding.

– CIST Port Identifier: the unique Port Identifier consisting of Port Number and Port Priority.– CIST Port Role– CIST Port Path Cost– CIST Port Designated Root– CIST Port Designated Cost– CIST Port Designated Bridge– CIST Port Designated Port Identifier– Administrative Connection Type– Operational ConnectionType– CIST Port Hello Time– CIST Port Bridge Hello Time– Force Port State

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

In the following example are shown information about MSTP CIST relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

(example in the next page)

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 263/432

Page 266: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02264/432

Page 267: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

mstp msti mstp_instance_set port naming_set_list config [forcestate {dynamic | blocked | forwarding}] [pri port_pri] [pathcost port_path_cost]

Description

This command allows to change the following MSTI information per port:

– Force Port State– Port Identifier Priority– Port Path Cost

When an optional value is absent, the corresponding currently configured value is not changed.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

mstp_instance_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 63] and specific symbols for representing a set of MSTP instance value ranges. For instance 1-3&21 means that the values 1, 2, 3 and 21 are specified.

port_path_costThe port path cost. Its value depends on the link speed of the port (e.g. if the link speed of the port is Mbit/s, port_path_cost= an integer value in the range [1 ... 200 000 000] and default value=20 000 000.

port_priWritable portion of the port identifier (the first 4 bit of 2 byte). An integer value in the range [0 ... 240] with granularity 16 and default value=128.

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 265/432

Page 268: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Example

In the following example has been typed the command to change for a specific port several MSTI parameters:

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02266/432

Page 269: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

mstp msti mstp_instance_set port naming_set_list show info

Description

This command allows to get the following MSTI information per port, for the MSTI identified by MSTID:

– MSTI Force Port State.– MSTI Port State: the current control plane state of the port. The possible values are: disabled,

learning and forwarding.– MSTI Port Identifier: the unique Port Identifier consisting of Port Number and Port Priority.– MSTI Port Role– MSTI Port Path Cost– MSTI Port Designated Root– MSTI Port Designated Cost– MSTI Port Designated Bridge– MSTI Port Designated Port Identifier

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

mstp_instance_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 63] and specific symbols for representing a set of MSTP instance value ranges. For instance 1-3&21 means that the values 1, 2, 3 and 21 are specified.

Example

In the following example are shown information about MSTP MSTI configured relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

(example in the next page)

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 267/432

Page 270: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02268/432

Page 271: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

10 IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

10.1 IGMP Snooping

A summary of available commands is listed here:

igmpsnoop enable vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop disable vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop proxyrep enable vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop proxyrep disable vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop fastleave enable port naming_set_list vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop fastleave disable port naming_set_list vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop config vlan vlan_set [gmi group_membership_interval] [lmqc last_member_query_count] [lmqi last_member_query_interval] [mrt max_response_time] [routertimeout router_timeout] [proxyversion {1 | 2 | 3}]

igmpsnoop add routerport naming_set_list vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop remove routerport naming_set_list vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop show vlanlist

igmpsnoop show configinfo vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop show mgroups vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop activate vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr [hostport naming_set_list]

igmpsnoop add hostport naming_set_list vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

igmpsnoop remove hostport naming_set_list vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

igmpsnoop delete vlan vlan_set [ip ipAddr]

igmpsnoop show staticmgroups [vlan vlan_set] [ip ipAddr]

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 269/432

Page 272: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpsnoop enable vlan vlan_set

Description

This command allows to enable IGMP Snooping functionality per VLAN.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02270/432

Page 273: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpsnoop disable vlan vlan_set

Description

This command allows to disable IGMP Snooping functionality per VLAN.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 271/432

Page 274: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpsnoop proxyrep enable vlan vlan_set

Description

These commands allow to enable IGMP Snooping Proxy Reporting functionality per VLAN.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02272/432

Page 275: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpsnoop proxyrep disable vlan vlan_set

Description

These commands allow to disable IGMP Snooping Proxy Reporting functionality per VLAN.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 273/432

Page 276: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpsnoop fastleave enable port naming_set_list vlan vlan_set

Description

These commands allow to enable Snooping Fast Leave functionality per <port, VLAN>.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02274/432

Page 277: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpsnoop fastleave disable port naming_set_list vlan vlan_set

Description

These commands allow to disable Snooping Fast Leave functionality per <port, VLAN>.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 275/432

Page 278: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpsnoop config vlan vlan_set [gmi group_membership_interval] [lmqc last_member_query_count] [lmqi last_member_query_interval] [mrt max_response_time] [routertimeout router_timeout] [proxyversion {1 | 2 | 3}]

Description

This command allows to change the following IGMP Snooping parameters per VLAN:

– Group Membership Interval– Last Member Query Count– Last Member Query Interval– Max Response Time– Neighbor router timeout– Proxy IGMP version (for both the generated Proxy Report messages and the generated Proxy

general Query messages)

When an optional value is absent, the corresponding currently configured value is not changed.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

group_membership_intervalAn integer value, measured in seconds, with default value=260.

last_member_query_countAn integer value, in the range [1 ... 255] and with default value=2.

max_response_timeAn integer value, measured in 0.1seconds, in the range [1 ... 255] and with default value=100.

router_timeoutAn integer value, measured in seconds, with default value=260.

last_member_query_intervalAn integer value, measured in 0.1seconds, in the range [1 ... 255] and with default value=10 (1sec).

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02276/432

Page 279: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpsnoop add routerport naming_set_list vlan vlan_set

Description

These commands allow to add static IGMP router ports per VLAN.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 277/432

Page 280: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpsnoop remove routerport naming_set_list vlan vlan_set

Description

These commands allow to remove static IGMP router ports per VLAN.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02278/432

Page 281: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpsnoop show vlanlist

Description

This command allows to report the list of VLAN with IGMP Snooping enabled.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 279/432

Page 282: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpsnoop show configinfo vlan vlan_set

Description

This command allows to report the IGMP Snooping configuration per VLAN.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02280/432

Page 283: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpsnoop show mgroups vlan vlan_set

Description

This command allows to report the following information about the list of registered membership requests per VLAN:

– the required group membership per <port,VLAN>– the IGMP version of the membership request– IP multicast destination address– (only if the used IGMP version=v3): filter-mode, source address

Syntax Definitions

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 281/432

Page 284: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpsnoop activate vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr [hostport naming_set_list]

Description

This command allows to create a static IGMP group membership entry, specifying:

– relevant <VLAN, IP multicast Address>– host ports

Syntax Definitions

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02282/432

Page 285: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpsnoop add hostport naming_set_list vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

Description

This command allows to add host ports to a static IGMP group membership entry.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 283/432

Page 286: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpsnoop remove hostport naming_set_list vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

Description

This command allows to remove host ports to a static IGMP group membership entry.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02284/432

Page 287: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpsnoop delete vlan vlan_set [ip ipAddr]

Description

This command allows to delete a static IGMP group membership entry, specifying the relevant <VLAN, IP multicast Address>. If IP address is not specified, all static IGMP group membership entries of that VLAN are deleted.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 285/432

Page 288: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpsnoop show staticmgroups [vlan vlan_set] [ip ipAddr]

Description

This command allows to show the list of all static IGMP group membership entries, showing for each of them the following information:

– <VLAN, IP multicast Address>– host ports

The command can be scoped to a certain VLAN set and/or IP Multicast address specifying the corresponding value.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02286/432

Page 289: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

10.2 IGMP Forced Reporting

This function is used only when the NE does NOT support IGMP Snooping.

A summary of available commands is listed here:

igmpforcedrep enable vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr routerport naming_set_list [version {1 | 2 | 3}] [repintv reporting_interval]

igmpforcedrep config vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr [version {1 | 2 | 3}] [repintv reporting_interval]

igmpforcedrep add routerport naming_set_list vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

igmpforcedrep remove routerport naming_set_list vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

igmpforcedrep disable vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

igmpforcedrep show [vlan vlan_set] [ip ipAddr]

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 287/432

Page 290: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpforcedrep enable vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr routerport naming_set_list [version {1 | 2 | 3}] [repintv reporting_interval]

Description

This command allows to enable IGMP Forced Reporting, specifying:

– Relevant <VLAN, IP multicast Address>– router ports– version of the Report message (default value = v2)– report message generation interval (default value = 60sec)

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

reporting_intervalAn integer value, measured in seconds, with default value=60.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02288/432

Page 291: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpforcedrep config vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr [version {1 | 2 | 3}] [repintv reporting_interval]

Description

This command allows to change for a IGMP Forced Reporting entry:

– version of the Report message– report message generation interval

Syntax Definitions

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

reporting_intervalAn integer value, measured in seconds, with default value=60.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 289/432

Page 292: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpforcedrep add routerport naming_set_list vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

Description

This command allows to add router ports for a IGMP Forced Reporting entry.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02290/432

Page 293: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpforcedrep remove routerport naming_set_list vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

Description

This command allows to remove router ports for a IGMP Forced Reporting entry.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 291/432

Page 294: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpforcedrep disable vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

Description

This command allows to disable IGMP Forced Reporting.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02292/432

Page 295: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpforcedrep show [vlan vlan_set] [ip ipAddr]

Description

This command allows to show the list of all IGMP Forced Reporting entries, showing for each of them the following information:

– <VLAN, IP multicast Address>– router ports– version of the Report message– report message generation interval

The command can be scoped to a ceratin VLAN set and/or IP Multicast address specifying the corresponding values.

Syntax Definitions

vlan_setAn expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094] and specific symbols for representing a set of VLAN value ranges.For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLAN values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are specified.

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 293/432

Page 296: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02294/432

Page 297: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

11 Link Aggregation Management Commands

A summary of available commands is listed here:

linkagg activate lag lag_userlabel adminkey adminkey_value [ets | bridge] [size lagsize_value] [maxmtu mtu_value] [vlanprotprof vlanprotprof_userlabel] [trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [floodinglimit floodinglimit_value] [asap asap_userlabel]

linkagg config lag lag_userlabel [size lagsize_value] [maxmtu mtu_value] [vlanprotprof vlanprotprof_userlabel] [trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [floodinglimit floodinglimit_value] asap asap_userlabel

linkagg config neprio ne_pri

linkagg delete lag lag_userlabel

linkagg show lag lag_userlabel

linkagg show laglist

linkagg port naming_set_list bind lag lag_userlabel [pri port_lnkaggpri]

linkagg port naming_set_list config pri port_lnkaggpri

linkagg port naming_set_list unbind

linkagg port naming_set_list show info

CLI Operation Guide

Link Aggregation Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 295/432

Page 298: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

linkagg activate lag lag_userlabel adminkey adminkey_value [ets | bridge] [size lagsize_value] [maxmtu mtu_value] [vlanprotprof vlanprotprof_userlabel] [trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [floodinglimit floodinglimit_value] [asap asap_userlabel]

Description

This command allows to create and activate a Link Aggregation Group.

If not specified in the command, the NE sets the optional parameter by default values (e.g.: LAG size is set to 8, client type is set to ETS; MTU and ASAP according to the relevant Alcatel 1850TSS-320 Data CT Operator’s Handbook; traffic status = enabled).

Syntax Definitions

adminkey_valueAn integer value in the range [1 ... 124].

mtu_valueAn integer value, indicating the MTU/MRU in byte. MTU/MRU allowed and default values are listed in the relevant Alcatel 1850TSS-320 CT Operations Guide.

floodinglimit_valueThe ingress port admitted flooding rate expressed in kbit/s (see Alcatel 1850TSS-320 CT Operations Guide).

lagsize_valueAn integer value, in the range [1 .. 16].

asap_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

lag_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

vlanprotprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Link Aggregation Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02296/432

Page 299: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

linkagg config lag lag_userlabel [size lagsize_value] [maxmtu mtu_value] [vlanprotprof vlanprotprof_userlabel] [trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [floodinglimit floodinglimit_value] asap asap_userlabel

Description

This command allows to change the ASAP for a Link Aggregation Group.

Syntax Definitions

mtu_valueAn integer value, indicating the MTU/MRU in byte. MTU/MRU allowed and default values are listed in the relevant Alcatel 1850TSS-320 CT Operation’s Guide.

floodinglimit_valueThe ingress port admitted flooding rate expressed in kbit/s (see Alcatel 1850TSS-320 CT Operation’s Guide).

lagsize_valueAn integer value, in the range [1 .. 16].

asap_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

lag_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

vlanprotprof_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Link Aggregation Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 297/432

Page 300: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

linkagg config neprio ne_pri

Description

This command allows to change the NE priority for all Ling aggregation Groups, defined in the NE.

The CLI code selects, by itself, one of the configured LAG and sets the NE priority attribute for this LAG. The NE is responsible for propagating this information on all LAGs configured in the NE.

Syntax Definitions

ne_priAn integer value, in the range [0 ... 65535], indicating the priority value associated with the Actor’s NE.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Link Aggregation Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02298/432

Page 301: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

linkagg delete lag lag_userlabel

Description

This command allows to deactivate and delete a Link Aggregation Group.

Syntax Definitions

lag_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Link Aggregation Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 299/432

Page 302: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

linkagg show lag lag_userlabel

Description

This command allows to get information about Link Aggregation Group.

Syntax Definitions

lag_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Link Aggregation Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02300/432

Page 303: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

linkagg show laglist

Description

This command allows to get the list of all configured link aggregation groups with user label and administrative key.It also shows the component LAG ports.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Link Aggregation Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 301/432

Page 304: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

linkagg port naming_set_list bind lag lag_userlabel [pri port_lnkaggpri]

Description

This command allows to bind local Ethernet ports to a LAG. If port priority is not specified, it is set to the default value.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

port_lnkaggpriLink Aggregation port priority (2 byte). An integer value in the range [0 ... 255] with default value=128.

lag_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Link Aggregation Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02302/432

Page 305: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

linkagg port naming_set_list config pri port_lnkaggpri

Description

This command allows to set the port priority of Aggregation ports.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

port_lnkaggpriLink Aggregation port priority (2 byte). An integer value in the range [0 ... 255] with default value=128.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Link Aggregation Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 303/432

Page 306: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

linkagg port naming_set_list unbind

Description

This command allows to unbind a local Ethernet port from a LAG.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Link Aggregation Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02304/432

Page 307: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

linkagg port naming_set_list show info

Description

This command allows to get information about aggregation ports in a LAG. It also provides the belonging LAG.

If any port, provided by user in the command, is not a LAG component port, the CLI should show its port index with the indication that it does not belong to any LAG.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Link Aggregation Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 305/432

Page 308: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Link Aggregation Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02306/432

Page 309: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

12 Port Segregation Management Commands

A summary of available commands is listed here:

portseg activate [port naming_set_list]

portseg add port naming_set_list

portseg remove port naming_set_list

portseg delete

portseg show info

CLI Operation Guide

Port Segregation Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 307/432

Page 310: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

portseg activate [port naming_set_list]

Description

This command allows to create and activate the Port Segregation set, configuring the member ports.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Port Segregation Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02308/432

Page 311: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

portseg add port naming_set_list

Description

This command allows to add ports to the Port Segregation set.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Port Segregation Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 309/432

Page 312: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

portseg remove port naming_set_list

Description

This command allows to remove ports from the Port Segregation set.

Syntax Definitions

naming_set_listA list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 … naming_set#n] an expression using integer values in the range [1 ... 4094], ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges; for instance:

r1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18

r1sr1sl7-9&19p4-6means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Port Segregation Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02310/432

Page 313: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

portseg delete

Description

This command allows to delete the Port Segregation set.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example are typed two commands:

– the first allows to delete the Port Segregation set;– the second shows the relevant status.

CLI Operation Guide

Port Segregation Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 311/432

Page 314: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

portseg show info

Description

This command allows to show the port list of the Port Segregation set.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example are shown information about the Port Segregation set:

CLI Operation Guide

Port Segregation Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02312/432

Page 315: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

13 Performance Monitoring Management Commands

13.1 Maintenance Measurement collection

A summary of available commands is listed here:

pmmaint show port naming

pmmaint show ethphy naming

CLI Operation Guide

Performance Monitoring Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 313/432

Page 316: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pmmaint show port naming

Description

This command will permit to request the Incoming and Outgoing Aggregate maintenance counters (type1), with the retrieving time.

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

Example

In the following example is shown information about the Incoming and Outgoing counters referred to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

(example in the next page)

CLI Operation Guide

Performance Monitoring Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02314/432

Page 317: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Performance Monitoring Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 315/432

Page 318: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pmmaint show ethphy naming

Description

This command will permit to request all PM counters on an Ethernet physical interface with the retrieving time:

– SymbolError– MediaAvailableExits– JabberState

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

Example

In the following example is shown information about all PM counters referred to a specific Ethernet port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of board in slot 6):

(example in the next page)

CLI Operation Guide

Performance Monitoring Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02316/432

Page 319: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Performance Monitoring Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 317/432

Page 320: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

13.2 QOS Measurement collection

A summary of available commands is listed here:

pmqos activate port naming

pmqos delete port naming

pmqos activate service flow_userlabel

pmqos delete service flow_userlabel

pmqos show granularity

N.B. the previous commands are NOT available in the current release.

CLI Operation Guide

Performance Monitoring Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02318/432

Page 321: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pmqos activate port naming

Description

This command allows to allocate Aggregare Current Data (CD) counters (type1), in both the incoming and outgoing direction, on a local ETH port.

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Performance Monitoring Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 319/432

Page 322: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pmqos delete port naming

Description

This command allows to delete the Aggregate CD counters (type1), in both the incoming and outgoing direction, on a local ETH port.

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Performance Monitoring Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02320/432

Page 323: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pmqos activate service flow_userlabel

Description

This command allows to allocate CD counters on a service.In detail, this command activates on:

– pbflowbid: Incoming and Outgoing Flow CD counters, associated to the only present ETS Inflow/OutFlow;

– portportbid: Incoming and Outgoing Flow CD counters, associated to the ETS Inflow/Outflow of both the involved ETS ports;

– pbflowinunidir: Incoming Flow CD counters, associated to the only present ETS Inflow;

– pbflowoutunidir: Outgoing Flow CD counters, associated to the only present ETS Outflow.

Refer to the relevant Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 CT Operations Guide for details about flows.

Syntax Definitions

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Performance Monitoring Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 321/432

Page 324: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pmqos delete service flow_userlabel

Description

This command allows to delete CD counters on a service.See “pmqos activate service flow_userlabel” command for CD of each service type.

Syntax Definitions

flow_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Performance Monitoring Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02322/432

Page 325: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pmqos show granularity

Description

This command allows to get the granularity period set by Manager for the HD collection.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown information about the granularity period:

CLI Operation Guide

Performance Monitoring Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 323/432

Page 326: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Performance Monitoring Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02324/432

Page 327: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

14 Support Management Commands

14.1 Alarm List and Log management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

alarmlist [domain domain_name] [severity severity] [time [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss[- [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss]] [position naming]

alarmsynth [domain | severity]

log info

log alarm [domain domain_name] [severity severity] [time [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss[- [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss]] [position naming]

log event [time [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss[-[yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss]] [position naming]

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 325/432

Page 328: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

alarmlist [domain domain_name] [severity severity] [time [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss[- [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss]] [position naming]

Description

This command allows to get the currently active Alarm List.

The user can profile the output by means of one or more combined optional parameters, which allow to select all alarms:

– of a specific domain– with a specific severity value– raised starting from a specific instant or within a specific time interval– concerning a certain resource

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

domain_nameThe domain name in the set {eqpt | ts | pm}.

severityThe associated severity in the set {critical | major | minor | warning | indeterminate}.

yy:mm:ddYear, an integer value in the range [1 ... 99]; month, an integer value in the range [1 ... 12]; day, an integer value in the range [1 ... 31].

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02326/432

Page 329: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

hh:mm:ssHour, an integer value in the range [0 ... 23]; minute, an integer value in the range [0 ... 59]; second, an integer value in the range [0 ... 59].

Example

In the following example is shown the information about the active Alarm List:

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 327/432

Page 330: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

alarmsynth [domain | severity]

Description

This command allows to get a synthesis of the currently active alarms, i.e the number of alarms grouped for different severity or different relevant domain (according to the entered optional parameter).

If no optional parameter is provided, the ‘severity’ choice is applied.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown the information about the synthesis of the currently active alarms:

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02328/432

Page 331: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

log info

Description

This command allows to get basic configuration information about the Log.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown the information about the Log:

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 329/432

Page 332: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

log alarm [domain domain_name] [severity severity] [time [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss[- [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss]] [position naming]

Description

This command allows to get the Alarm Log records.

The user can profile the output by means of one or more combined optional parameters, which allow to select all alarm log records:

– of a specific domain– with a specific severity value– raised starting from a specific instant or within a specific time interval– affecting a certain resource

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

domain_nameThe domain name in the set {eqpt | ts | pm}.

severityThe associated severity in the set {critical | major | minor | warning | indeterminate}.

yy:mm:ddYear, an integer value in the range [1 ... 99]; month, an integer value in the range [1 ... 12]; day, an integer value in the range [1 ... 31].

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02330/432

Page 333: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

hh:mm:ssHour, an integer value in the range [0 ... 23]; minute, an integer value in the range [0 ... 59]; second, an integer value in the range [0 ... 59].

Example

In the following example is shown the information about the Alarm Log records:

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 331/432

Page 334: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

log event [time [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss[-[yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss]] [position naming]

Description

This command allows to get to the Event Log records.

The user can profile the output by means of one or more combined optional parameters, which allow to select all event log records:

– raised starting from a specific instant or within a specific time interval– concerning a certain resource

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

yy:mm:ddYear, an integer value in the range [1 ... 99]; month, an integer value in the range [1 ... 12]; day, an integer value in the range [1 ... 31].

hh:mm:ssHour, an integer value in the range [0 ... 23]; minute, an integer value in the range [0 ... 59]; second, an integer value in the range [0 ... 59].

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02332/432

Page 335: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Example

In the following example is shown the information about the Log events:

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 333/432

Page 336: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

14.2 Alarm Profile management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

severitydef config severity

severitydef show

alarmprofile create alarmprofile_userlabel [cloneof alarmprofile_userlabel] [pcauselist pcause:confseverity:confseveritynsa [pcause:confseverity:confseveritynsa]...]

alarmprofile delete alarmprofile_userlabel

alarmprofile config alarmprofile_userlabel pcauselist pcause:confseverity: confseveritynsa [pcause:confseverity:confseveritynsa]

alarmprofile rename alarmprofile_userlabel into alarmprofile_userlabel

alarmprofile show [alarmprofile_userlabel]

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02334/432

Page 337: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

severitydef config severity

Description

This command allows to set the default severity.

Syntax Definitions

severityThe associated severity in the set {critical | major | minor | warning | indeterminate}.

Example

In the following example have been typed two commands:

– the first is relevant to set the severity;– the second has been typed to report all the relevant severity definition information updated.

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 335/432

Page 338: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

severitydef show

Description

This command allows to get the default severity.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown all the relevant severity definition information:

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02336/432

Page 339: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

alarmprofile create alarmprofile_userlabel [cloneof alarmprofile_userlabel] [pcauselist pcause:confseverity:confseveritynsa [pcause:confseverity:confseveritynsa]...]

Description

This command allows to create a new alarm profile. It is possible creating a clone of an existing alarm profile, by specifying its user label.

If no clone is provided, an alarm profile, in which default severity is assigned to all probable causes, is created. It is also possible to modify, at creation time, the severity and the severity ‘non-traffic affecting’ of one or more probable causes.

Syntax Definitions

pcauseA string representing a probable cause, in the Table 5. on page 38.

confseverity, confseveritynsaThe configured severity or severity “non-service affecting” in the set {critical | major | minor | warning | indeterminate | cleared}.

alarmprofile_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example have been typed two commands:

– the first is relevant to create an Alarm Severity Profile;– the second has been typed to report all the relevant Alarm Severity Profile information

updated.

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 337/432

Page 340: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

alarmprofile delete alarmprofile_userlabel

Description

This command allows to delete a configurable Alarm Profile.

Syntax Definitions

alarmprofile_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example is shown the deletion of a specific Alarm Severity Profile:

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02338/432

Page 341: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

alarmprofile config alarmprofile_userlabel pcauselist pcause:confseverity: confseveritynsa [pcause:confseverity:confseveritynsa]

Description

This command allows to modify the severity and the severity ‘non-service affecting’ associated to a probable cause of an Alarm Profile.

Syntax Definitions

pcauseA string representing a probable cause, in the Table 5. on page 38.

confseverity, confseveritynsaThe configured severity or severity “non-service affecting” in the set {critical | major | minor | warning | indeterminate | cleared}.

alarmprofile_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 339/432

Page 342: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

alarmprofile rename alarmprofile_userlabel into alarmprofile_userlabel

Description

This command allows to change the label of an alarm profile, created by user.

Syntax Definitions

alarmprofile_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example have been typed two commands:

– the first is relevant to rename a specific Alarm Severity Profile;– the second has been typed to report all the relevant Alarm Severity Profile information

updated.

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02340/432

Page 343: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

alarmprofile show [alarmprofile_userlabel]

Description

If no alarm profile user label is specified, this command allows to get the list of the user labels of all alarm profiles.

If an alarm profile user label is specified, this command allows to get the details of that alarm profile.

Syntax Definitions

alarmprofile_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example is shown all the relevant Alarm Severity Profile information:

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 341/432

Page 344: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

14.3 SW Package management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

swpkg activate pkgversion [forced]

swpkg commit

swpkg show {info [pkg pkgversion] | board naming}

swpkg restart

swpkg show profile

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02342/432

Page 345: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

swpkg activate pkgversion [forced]

Description

This command allows to activate a stand-by software version, which is already stored on the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element.It is possible to force the activation of the currently active software version, by the ‘forced’ optional param-eter.

Syntax Definitions

pkgversionIt is a value in the form xx.xx.xx (e.g. 02.11.00) where:

• the first field represents the Major version• the second field represents the Minor version• the third field represents the Maintenance version

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 343/432

Page 346: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

swpkg commit

Description

This command allows to commit the current active software version on the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02344/432

Page 347: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

swpkg show {info [pkg pkgversion] | board naming}

Description

This command allows to request information about the Software Package:

– if the user select ‘info’ and:

• does not provide any optional parameter, information for all units of all software packages stored in the NE is shown;

• provides the ‘pkg’ optional parameter, information for all units of the specified software package is shown.

– if the user select ‘board’:

• information for SW unit running in the specified board is shown.

Syntax Definitions

pkgversionIt is a value in the form xx.xx.xx (e.g. 02.11.00) where:

• the first field represents the Major version• the second field represents the Minor version• the third field represents the Maintenance version

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 345/432

Page 348: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Example

In the following example have been typed two commands:

– the first is relevant to Network Element information;– the second is a request of SW information relevant to a specific board (slot 10).

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02346/432

Page 349: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

swpkg restart

Description

This command allows to restart the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element, using the committed software version.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example has been typed the command relevant to the SW restart of the equipment:

Note: after the execution of this command the connection to the equipment is lost.

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 347/432

Page 350: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

swpkg show profile

Description

This command allows to get the actual Software Package profile.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown the SW package profile loaded on the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element:

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02348/432

Page 351: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

14.4 Agent management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

ne location nelocation

ne label ne_userlabel

ne mgr {B$ | E$}

ne show info

accessctrl config timeout resptimeout

accessctrl request

accessctrl release

accessctrl show info

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 349/432

Page 352: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

ne location nelocation

Description

This command allows to configure the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element location.

Syntax Definitions

nelocationA string indicating the location of the node.

Example

In the following example is shown the command to set the Network Element location:

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02350/432

Page 353: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

ne label ne_userlabel

Description

This command allows to configure the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element label.

Syntax Definitions

ne_userlabelAn ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example

In the following example is shown the command to set the Network Element label:

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 351/432

Page 354: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

ne mgr {B$ | E$}

Description

This command allows to flag whether (B$) or not (E$) the manager BM is managing the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown the command to (tbc):

Note: this command is NOT available for Operator.

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02352/432

Page 355: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

ne show info

Description

This command allows to show the following Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element information:

– NE installation type– IM version– NE location– NE label– Label of the OS managing the NE– NE SW release– Configuration of management interface

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown the Network Element information:

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 353/432

Page 356: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

accessctrl config timeout resptimeout

Description

This command allows to configure the Local Access Control (LAC) ‘no-response’ timeout for CLI.

Syntax Definitions

resptimeoutAn integer number, measured in seconds, in the range [0 ... 3600].

Example

In the following example is shown the command to configure the Local Access Control (60 seconds):

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02354/432

Page 357: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

accessctrl request

Description

This command allows to perform LAC request.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 355/432

Page 358: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

accessctrl release

Description

This command allows to perform LAC release.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown the command to release the Local Access Control:

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02356/432

Page 359: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

accessctrl show info

Description

This command allows to show LAC information:

– LAC state– LAC no response time-out– last time the LAC status has become ‘granted’

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example are shown information about LAC:

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 357/432

Page 360: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

14.5 Time management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

ne time [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss

ntp {enable | disable}

ntp serverip {main ipAddr spare ipAddr | main ipAddr | spare ipAddr}

ne show time

ntp show

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02358/432

Page 361: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

ne time [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss

Description

This command allows to set the NE time.This command can be performed only if NTP is disabled.

Syntax Definitions

yy:mm:ddYear, an integer value in the range [1 ... 99]; month, an integer value in the range [1 ... 12]; day, an integer value in the range [1 ... 31].

hh:mm:ssHour, an integer value in the range [0 ... 23]; minute, an integer value in the range [0 ... 59]; second, an integer value in the range [0 ... 59].

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 359/432

Page 362: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

ntp {enable | disable}

Description

This command allows to enable/disable the NTP.If, when NTP is enabled, no NTP server is configured, the NE works in holdover.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown the command to disable the NTP:

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02360/432

Page 363: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

ntp serverip {main ipAddr spare ipAddr | main ipAddr | spare ipAddr}

Description

This command allows to configure the IP addresses of the main and spare NTP servers.This command can be performed only if NTP is enabled.

Syntax Definitions

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 361/432

Page 364: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

ne show time

Description

This command allows to get the NE time.This command can be performed only if NTP is disabled.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02362/432

Page 365: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

ntp show

Description

This command allows to get the following information about NTP:

– NTP status– main and spare NTP-server addresses– NTP-servers reachability by the NE

This command can be performed only if NTP is enabled.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example are shown information about NTP status and configuration:

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 363/432

Page 366: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

14.6 Resource management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

resource show {ne | board naming}

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02364/432

Page 367: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

resource show {ne | board naming}

Description

This command allows to show all applicable pool resources for either the entire NE or a specific board.

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 365/432

Page 368: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

14.7 Abnormal condition management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

abnormalcond show

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02366/432

Page 369: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

abnormalcond show

Description

This command allows to show the Abnormal Conditions in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element.

Note: this command is NOT available in the current release.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

Note: this command is NOT available in the current release.

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 367/432

Page 370: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

14.8 Auto Provisioning

A summary of available commands is listed here:

plugandplay {confirmed | full | no}

plugandplay show

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02368/432

Page 371: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

plugandplay {confirmed | full | no}

Description

This command allows to set the auto-provisioning mode on Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element.

Note that the CLI can perform only ‘full’ and ‘no’ auto-provisioning behavior. When ‘confirmed’ option is configured, the CLI behaves as in case of ‘no’ auto-provisioning: it means that no confirmation is provided to user about new plugged item. As result, no automatic configuration is performed.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown a command to set an auto discovery parameter:

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 369/432

Page 372: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

plugandplay show

Description

This command allows to get the auto-provisioning configuration on Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown the command to get the auto-provisioning configuration:

CLI Operation Guide

Support Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02370/432

Page 373: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

15 Communication&Routing Management Commands

15.1 Agent Address management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

ne ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask udp transportPortNumber

ne show addr

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 371/432

Page 374: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

ne ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask udp transportPortNumber

Description

This command allows to set the IP address, netmask and UDP port of the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element agent.

Syntax Definitions

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

ipAddrBitMaskAn IP address netmask in decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

transportPortNumberAn integer number.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02372/432

Page 375: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

ne show addr

Description

This command allows to get the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element agent IP address, netmask and UDP port.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example are shown information about Agent addresses:

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 373/432

Page 376: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

15.2 NE Auto-discovery feature

A summary of available commands is listed here:

autodiscovery {enable | disable}

autodiscovery show

os {ipmain ipAddr udpmain transportPortNumber | ipspare ipAddr udpspare transportPortNumber | ipmain ipAddr udpmain transportPortNumber ipspare ipAddr udpspare transportPortNumber}

os show

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02374/432

Page 377: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

autodiscovery {enable | disable}

Description

This command allows to enable the auto discovery functionality.If no OS Address is configured, the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element is in charge of reject-ing the enabling command.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example have been typed two commands:

– the first is relevant to enable the auto discovery;– the second has been typed to report all the relevant auto discovery information updated.

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 375/432

Page 378: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

autodiscovery show

Description

This command allows to get the auto discovery status.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown information about auto discovery status:

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02376/432

Page 379: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

os {ipmain ipAddr udpmain transportPortNumber | ipspare ipAddr udpspare transportPortNumber | ipmain ipAddr udpmain transportPortNumber ipspare ipAddr udpspare transportPortNumber}

Description

This command allows to set the IP address and the UDP port for the OS main and spare.In case an optional parameter is absent, the previous configured value is not changed.This command can be applied even when the auto discovery is already enabled.

Syntax Definitions

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

transportPortNumberAn integer number.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 377/432

Page 380: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

os show

Description

This command allows to get the IP address and the UDP port for the OS main and spare.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example are shown information about OS:

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02378/432

Page 381: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

15.3 IP Management Plane

A summary of available commands is listed here:

mgmtport activate ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]}

mgmtport config { ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]} | ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask | ip ipAddr routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]} | ipmask ipAddrBitMask routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]} | ip ipAddr | ipmask ipAddrBitMask | routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]}}

mgmtport delete

mgmtport show

dcn activate port naming vlan vlan_id routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]}

dcn config port naming {vlan vlan_id routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]} | vlan vlan_id | routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]}}

dcn delete port naming

dcn show [port naming]

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 379/432

Page 382: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

mgmtport activate ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]}

Description

This command allows to create and activate a local Ethernet management interface.

Note: in the current release only one local Ethernet interface is managed (no FLC protection).

Syntax Definitions

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

ipAddrBitMaskAn IP address netmask in decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

ospfarea_index The ID of the corresponding OSPF area entry.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02380/432

Page 383: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

mgmtport config { ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]} | ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask | ip ipAddr routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]} | ipmask ipAddrBitMask routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]} | ip ipAddr | ipmask ipAddrBitMask | routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]}}

Description

This command allows to configure a local Ethernet management interface.

Syntax Definitions

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

ipAddrBitMaskAn IP address netmask in decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

ospfarea_index The ID of the corresponding OSPF area entry.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 381/432

Page 384: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

mgmtport delete

Description

This command allows to delete a local Ethernet management interface.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02382/432

Page 385: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

mgmtport show

Description

This command allows to retrieve detailed information about all configured local Ethernet management interfaces.

Note: in the current release only one local Ethernet interface is managed (no FLC protection).

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example are shown information about all configured Ethernet interfaces:

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 383/432

Page 386: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

dcn activate port naming vlan vlan_id routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]}

Description

This command allows to create and activate a DCN management interface.

Syntax Definitions

ospfarea_index The ID of the corresponding OSPF area entry.

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02384/432

Page 387: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

dcn config port naming {vlan vlan_id routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]} | vlan vlan_id | routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]}}

Description

This command allows to configure a DCN management interface.

Syntax Definitions

ospfarea_index The ID of the corresponding OSPF area entry.

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

vlan_idAn integer value in the set [1 ... 4094], indicating the VID (or the lower bound of a VLAN ID range).

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 385/432

Page 388: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

dcn delete port naming

Description

This command allows to delete a DCN management interface.

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02386/432

Page 389: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

dcn show [port naming]

Description

If the optional parameter is absent, this command allows to retrieve detailed information about all configured DCN management interfaces.

The user can retrieve detailed information of only a single DCN management interface by providing its naming.

Syntax Definitions

namingThe following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:

rRsrSslBdDpP , where:

R Rack 1 ..... 7

S Subrack 0 or 1 ..... 7

B Board 0 or 1 ..... 63

D Drawer 0 or 1 ..... 7

P Port 0 or 1 ..... 1023

Note: when a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted in the naming.

Note: in commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board≠0 and drawer=port=0; in commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, port≠0.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 387/432

Page 390: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

15.4 IP Management Plane: IP Routing management

A summary of available commands is listed here:

ospfarea activate ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask stubflag {y | n}

ospfarea config id ospfarea_index {ipmask ipAddrBitMask stubflag {y | n} | ipmask ipAddrBitMask | stubflag {y | n}}

ospfarea delete id ospfarea_index

ospfarea show

routingstatic activate ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask gateway ipAddr port naming

routingstatic delete ip ipAddr

routingstatic show [ip ipAddr]

routing show info

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02388/432

Page 391: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

ospfarea activate ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask stubflag {y | n}

Description

This command allows to create and activate an OSPF routing area entry.

Syntax Definitions

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

ipAddrBitMaskAn IP address netmask in decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 389/432

Page 392: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

ospfarea config id ospfarea_index {ipmask ipAddrBitMask stubflag {y | n} | ipmask ipAddrBitMask | stubflag {y | n}}

Description

This command allows to configure an OSPF routing area entry.

Syntax Definitions

ipAddrBitMaskAn IP address netmask in decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

ospfarea_index The ID of the corresponding OSPF area entry.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02390/432

Page 393: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

ospfarea delete id ospfarea_index

Description

This command allows to delete an OSPF routing area entry.

Syntax Definitions

ospfarea_index The ID of the corresponding OSPF area entry.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 391/432

Page 394: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

ospfarea show

Description

This command allows to retrieve information about all OSPF routing area entries.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02392/432

Page 395: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

routingstatic activate ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask gateway ipAddr port naming

Description

This command allows to create and activate an IP static routing path, providing the destination IP address/mask, the gateway IP address and the NE outgoing interface.

Syntax Definitions

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

ipAddrBitMaskAn IP address netmask in decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 393/432

Page 396: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

routingstatic delete ip ipAddr

Description

This command allows to delete an IP static routing path.

Syntax Definitions

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02394/432

Page 397: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

routingstatic show [ip ipAddr]

Description

If no optional parameter is provided, this command allows to retrieve information about all configured IP static routing paths.

The user can get information only for a single destination, by providing its IP address.

Syntax Definitions

ipAddrAn IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 395/432

Page 398: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

routing show info

Description

This command allows to retrieve information about all IP static and dynamic routing paths.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Communication&Routing Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02396/432

Page 399: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

16 Security Management Commands

A summary of available commands is listed here:

user create login user_login userprofile user_profile

user delete login user_login

user changepwd

user changepwd login user_login

user show

CLI Operation Guide

Security Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 397/432

Page 400: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI handles four user profiles: administrator, constructor, operator, viewer. Each user profile has specific rights:

• Administrator can perform all defined commands, except for:

– “ne mgr {B$ | E$}” command

• Constructor can perform all defined commands, except for:

– “user create login user_login userprofile user_profile” command– “user delete login user_login” command– “user changepwd login user_login” command

• Operator can perform all defined commands, except for:

– “ne mgr {B$ | E$}” command– “user create login user_login userprofile user_profile” command– “user delete login user_login” command– “user changepwd login user_login” command

• Viewer can perform all get commands; it cannot perform configuration operations, except for:

– “user changepwd” command

A user that is starting a CLI session (Telnet session) has to provide the login/password of a user that has been defined in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element, for getting access.

CLI Operation Guide

Security Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02398/432

Page 401: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

user create login user_login userprofile user_profile

Description

This command allows to create a new user.

The user that is excuting the operation enters the command with login and user profile. As soon as the command has been entered, the CLI provides a new prompt requiring the password. The user is required to enter the password twice.

The password should be displayed as a string of ‘star characters’, i.e. the echo of each entered character is *.

Syntax Definitions

user_profileThe security user profile, in the set {administrator | constructor | operator | viewer}.

user_loginA string representing the user login.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Security Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 399/432

Page 402: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

user delete login user_login

Description

This command allows to delete a user.

Syntax Definitions

user_loginA string representing the user login.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Security Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02400/432

Page 403: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

user changepwd

Description

This command allows a user to change its own password.

The user that is excuting the operation enters the command. As soon as the command has been entered, the CLI provides a new prompt requiring the password. The user is required to enter the password twice.

The password should be displayed as a string of *.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example is shown the user password modification (twice digitation):

CLI Operation Guide

Security Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 401/432

Page 404: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

user changepwd login user_login

Description

This command allows a user to change the password of another user.

The user that is executing the operation enters the command. As soon as the command has been entered, the CLI provides a new prompt requiring the password. The user is required to enter the password twice.

The password should be displayed as a string of *.

Syntax Definitions

user_loginA string representing the user login.

Example

(tba)

CLI Operation Guide

Security Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02402/432

Page 405: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

user show

Description

This command allows to get the user list of the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 Network Element.

Syntax Definitions

N/A

Example

In the following example are shown all the relevant User information:

CLI Operation Guide

Security Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 403/432

Page 406: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Security Management Commands

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02404/432

Page 407: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

17 CLI Quick Reference

In the following pages all CLI commands assembled by function (Equipment, Ethernet, STP, Performance Monitoring, ecc.) are listed:

• divided in Commands Groups (see para. 17.1 on page 406)

• sorted in Alphabetical Order (see para. 17.2 on page 418)

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 405/432

Page 408: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

17.1 CLI commands listed by Commands Groups

Equipment Management Commands

1... eqpt position naming_set_list type eqpt_type

2... eqpt position naming_set_list show type

3... eqpt position naming_set_list asap asap_userlabel

4... eqpt position naming_set_list show asap

5... eqpt position naming_set_list show allowedeqpt

6... eqpt position naming_set_list show info

7... eqpt position naming_set_list show ri

8... eqpt position naming reset

9... eqpt show allpositions

10... eqpt show linkstatus

11... eqpt show nename

12... eqpt prot manualswitch from naming to naming

13... eqpt prot show unit naming

14... extpoint in extpointin_naming userlabel extpoint_userlabel

15... extpoint in extpointin_naming asap asap_userlabel

16... extpoint in extpointin_naming show asap

17... extpoint show in

18... extpoint out extpointout_naming userlabel extpoint_userlabel

19... extpoint out extpointout_naming criteria {manual | remote | auto {eventtype_id | eventtype_name}}

20... extpoint show out

21... extpoint show outeventslist

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02406/432

Page 409: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Ethernet Physical, GFP and LAPS Management Commands

22... interface show [naming_set_list]

23... interface trafficshow [naming_set_list]

24... interface position naming_set_list localeth defaulttype {10 | 100 | 1000 | 10ge-r | 10ge-sr | 10ge-lr | 10ge-er}

25... interface position naming_set_list localeth show mauinfo

26... interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg {enable | disable}

27... interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg restart

28... interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg advertisedcapability [10 | 100 | 1000 | 10&100 | 10&100&1000] [nopause | asympause | sympause | asym&sympause]

29... interface position naming_set_list localeth show autoneg

30... interface position naming_set_list localeth rcfaction {none | shutdown}

31... interface position naming_set_list localeth show rcfaction

32... interface position naming_set_list localeth loopback {line | internal} {enable | disable}

33... interface position naming_set_list localeth show loopback

34... interface position naming_set_list localeth trafficstatus {enable | disable}

35... interface position naming_set_list localeth floodinglimit floodinglimit_value

36... interface position naming_set_list localeth show trafficconditioning

37... interface position naming_set_list remoteeth ratelimited ratelimited_value

38... interface position naming_set_list remoteeth sl {auto | eqptnonspec}

39... interface position naming_set_list remoteeth csf {disable | bidir | unidir | backward | univcais}

40... interface position naming_set_list remoteeth fcs {disable | enable}

41... interface position naming_set_list remoteeth asap asap_userlabel

42... interface position naming_set_list remoteeth flag {one | two}

43... interface position naming_set_list remoteeth errorframe {abortseq | fcs}

44... interface position naming_set_list remoteeth trafficstatus {enable | disable}

45... interface position naming_set_list remoteeth floodinglimit floodinglimit_value

46... interface position naming_set_list remoteeth show trafficconditioning

47... interface position naming_set_list remoteeth show mappinginfo

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 407/432

Page 410: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Ethernet Port Management Commands

48... interface position naming_set_list localeth {activate | deactivate}

49... interface position naming_set_list localeth portservice {ets | bridge}

50... interface position naming_set_list localeth maxmtu mtu_value

51... interface position naming_set_list localeth defaultflowcontrol {nopause | asympause | sympause}

52... interface position naming_set_list localeth admittedfractionalrate admitted_fractional_rate

53... interface position naming_set_list localeth ethasap asap_userlabel

54... intf position naming_set_list localeth config [defaulttype {10 | 100 | 1000 | 10ge-r | 10ge-sr | 10ge-lr | 10ge-er}] [asap asap_userlabel] [rcfaction {none | shutdown}] [trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [floodinglimit floodinglimit_value] [portservice {ets | bridge}] [maxmtu mtu_value] [defaultflowcontrol {nopause | asympause | sympause}] [admittedfractionalrate admitted_fractional_rate] [ethasap asap_userlabel]

55... interface position naming_set_list localeth show ethinfo

56... interface position naming_set_list remoteeth {activate | deactivate}

57... interface position naming_set_list remoteeth portservice {ets | bridge}

58... interface position naming_set_list remoteeth maxmtu mtu_value

59... intf position naming_set_list remoteeth config [ratelimited ratelimited_value] [sl {auto | eqptnonspec}] [trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [floodinglimit floodinglimit_value] [asap asap_userlabel] [portservice {ets | bridge}] [maxmtu mtu_value] [[[csf {disable | bidir | unidir | backward | univcais}] [fcs {disable | enable}]] | [[flag {one | two}] [errorframe {abortseq | fcs}]]]

60... interface position naming_set_list remoteeth show ethinfo

61... interface position naming_set_list vlanprotprofile bind vlanprotprof_userlabel

62... interface position naming_set_list vlanprotprofile default

63... interface position naming_set_list vlanprotprofile activate vlanprotprof_userlabel [type ethertype_value]

64... interface position naming_set_list vlanprotprofile show [vlanprotprof_userlabel]

65... interface position naming_set_list l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}

66... interface position naming_set_list show vlanprotprofile

67... interface position naming_set_list show vlanset

68... interface position naming_set_list show l2ctrlframe

69... vlanprotprofile activate vlanprotprof_userlabel [type ethertype_value]

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02408/432

Page 411: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

70... vlanprotprofile delete vlanprotprof_userlabel

71... vlanprotprofile show [vlanprof_userlabel]

72... acl create acl_userlabel

73... acl delete acl_userlabel

74... acl enable acl_userlabel

75... acl disable acl_userlabel

76... acl add acl_userlabel element {permit | deny} order aceorder_number macda macAddr [macdabitmask macBitMask] macsa macAddr [macsabitmask macBitMask] vlan vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] ethertype ethertype_value[-maxEthertype_value]

77... acl remove acl_userlabel element ace_index

78... acl show [acl_userlabel]

79... interface position naming_set_list acl bind acl_userlabel

80... interface position naming_set_list acl unbind

81... interface position naming_set_list acl show

Ethernet Flow and Ethernet Flow QOS Management Commands

82... inflowclassifier add flow_userlabel [vlan {vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] | dontcare| untagged }] [pri {pri[-maxpri] | dontcare | untagged}] [dscp {dscp[-maxdscp] | dontcare | noip}]

83... inflowclassifier remove classifier_id

84... inflowclassifier show [flow_userlabel]

85... colorprofile activate colorprof_userlabel {pri {allg | ally | pri_set} | dscp {default | allg | ally | dscp_set}}

86... colorprofile delete colorprof_userlabel

87... colorprofile show [colorprof_userlabel]

88... trafficdescriptor activate trafficdescriptor_userlabel traffictype {be | reg | gua | group} cir cir_value {pir pir_value | eir eir_value} cbs cbs_value {pbs pbs_value | ebs ebs_value}

89... trafficdescriptor delete trafficdescriptor_userlabel

90... trafficdescriptor show [trafficdescriptor_userlabel]

91... flowgroup activate flowgroup_userlabel port naming trafficdescriptor trafficdescriptor_userlabel policingmode {c-blind | ietfc-aware | mefc-aware-cf0 | mefc-aware-cf1 | disabled} [colorprofile colorprof_userlabel]

92... flowgroup delete flowgroup_userlabel

93... flowgroup show [flowgroup_userlabel]

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 409/432

Page 412: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Services Management Commands

94... flow show

95... pbflowbid activate flow_userlabel port naming classificationmode {pri | dscp} inflowclassifier [vlan {vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] | dontcare| untagged}] [pri {pri[-maxpri] | dontcare | untagged}] [dscp {dscp[-maxdscp] | dontcare | noip}] trafficdescriptor trafficdescriptor_userlabel svlan vlan_id [l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}] [policingmode {c-blind | ietfc-aware | mefc-aware-cf0 | mefc-aware-cf1 | disabled}] [colorprofile colorprof_userlabel] [pop] [push cvlan vlan_id mode {colorblind | coloraware} cpri pri [cpriyellow priyellow]] [flowgroup flowgroup_userlabel]

96... pbflowbid config flow_userlabel l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}

97... pbflowbid delete flow_userlabel

98... pbflowbid show [flow_userlabel]

99... portportbid activate flow_userlabel port1 naming port2 naming

100...portportbid delete flow_userlabel

101...portportbid show [flow_userlabel]

102...pbflowinunidir activate flow_userlabel port naming classificationmode {pri | dscp} inflowclassifier [vlan {vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] | dontcare| untagged}] [pri {pri[-maxpri] | dontcare | untagged}] [dscp {dscp[-maxdscp] | dontcare | noip}] trafficdescriptor trafficdescriptor_userlabel svlan vlan_id [l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}] [policingmode {c-blind | ietfc-aware | mefc-aware-cf0 | mefc-aware-cf1 | disabled}] [colorprofile colorprof_userlabel] [pop] [flowgroup flowgroup_userlabel]

103...pbflowinunidir config flow_userlabel l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}

104...pbflowinunidir delete flow_userlabel

105...pbflowinunidir show [flow_userlabel]

106...pbflowoutunidir activate flow_userlabel port naming svlan vlan_id [push cvlan vlan_id mode {colorblind | coloraware} cpri pri [cpriyellow priyellow]]

107...pbflowoutunidir delete flow_userlabel

108...pbflowoutunidir show [flow_userlabel]

109...cbpdu activate flow_userlabel port naming svlan vlan_id

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02410/432

Page 413: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

MAC/Virtual/Provider Bridge Port and Bridge Port QOS Management Commands

110...bridge type {mac | virtual | provider}

111...bridge show type

112...bridge vlan activate vlan_set [portset naming_set_list#1 [u] [naming_set_list#2 [u] naming_set_list#n [u]]]

113...bridge vlan delete vlan_set

114...bridge vlan add vlan_set portset naming_set_list#1 [u] [naming_set_list#2 [u] naming_set_list#n [u]]

115...bridge vlan remove vlan_set portset naming_set_list#1 [u] [naming_set_list#2 [u] naming_set_list#n [u]]

116...bridge vlan show [vlan_set]

117...bridge port naming_set_list config [ingressfilter {on | off}] [acceptableframetype {all | vlan-tagged}] [pvid vlan_id] [defaultpri {0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7}] [regenerationpritable 0:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 1:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 2:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 3:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 4:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 5:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 6:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 7:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7}]

118...bridge port naming_set_list show info [vlan vlan_set]

119...bridge vlanprotprofile bind vlanprotprof_userlabel

120...bridge vlanprotprofile default

121...bridge vlanprotprofile activate vlanprotprof_userlabel [type ethertype_value]

122...bridge vlanprotprofile delete vlanprotprof_userlabel

123...bridge vlanprotprofile show [vlanprotprof_userlabel]

Ethernet Switch Management Commands

124...bridgedbfiltering agetime filterDbAgeTime_value

125...bridgedbfiltering show agetime

126...bridgedbfiltering show overloads

127...bridgedbfiltering delete mac macAddr [vlan vlan_id] [portin naming]

128...bridgedbfiltering activate mac macAddr [vlan vlan_id] [portin naming] [portout naming_set_list]

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 411/432

Page 414: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

129...bridgedbfiltering show unicast-dynamic mac macAddr [vlan vlan_id ] [portout naming_set_list]

130...bridgedbfiltering show unicast-static [mac macAddr] [vlan vlan_id]

131...bridgedbfiltering show multicast-static [mac macAddr] [vlan vlan_id]

132...bridgedbfiltering show multicast-dynamic [mac macAddr] [vlan vlan_id]

Spanning Tree Protocol Management Commands

133...stp enable {stp | rstp | pervlanrstp | mstp}

134...stp disable

135...stp show type

136...stp config [vlan vlan_set] [pri bridge_pri] [maxage bridge_max_age] [hellotime bridge_hello_time] [fwddelay bridge_forward_delay]

137...stp show info [vlan vlan_set]

138...stp port naming_set_list config [vlan vlan_set] [pri port_pri] [pathcost port_path_cost] [forcestate {dynamic | blocked | forwarding}] [adminxctype {edge | ptp | noptp | auto}]

139...stp port naming_set_list show info [vlan vlan_set]

140...mstp cist config [pri bridge_pri] [maxage bridge_max_age] [hellotime bridge_hello_time] [fwddelay bridge_forward_delay]

141...mstp cist show info

142...mstp msti mstp_instance_set activate

143...mstp msti mstp_instance_set delete

144...mstp msti mstp_instance_set config [pri bridge_pri]

145...mstp msti mstp_instance_set show info

146...mstp msti mstp_instance vlan vlan_set

147...mstp show msti [vlan vlan_set]

148...mstp show vlan [msti mstp_instance_set]

149...mstp cist port naming_set_list config [forcestate {dynamic | blocked | forwarding}] [adminxctype {edge | ptp | noptp | auto}] [pri port_pri] [pathcost port_path_cost]

150...mstp cist port naming_set_list show info

151...mstp msti mstp_instance_set port naming_set_list config [forcestate {dynamic | blocked | forwarding}] [pri port_pri] [pathcost port_path_cost]

152...mstp msti mstp_instance_set port naming_set_list show info

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02412/432

Page 415: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

IGMP Related Topics Management Commands

153...igmpsnoop enable vlan vlan_set

154...igmpsnoop disable vlan vlan_set

155...igmpsnoop proxyrep enable vlan vlan_set

156...igmpsnoop proxyrep disable vlan vlan_set

157...igmpsnoop fastleave enable port naming_set_list vlan vlan_set

158...igmpsnoop fastleave disable port naming_set_list vlan vlan_set

159...igmpsnoop config vlan vlan_set [gmi group_membership_interval] [lmqc last_member_query_count] [lmqi last_member_query_interval] [mrt max_response_time] [routertimeout router_timeout] [proxyversion {1 | 2 | 3}]

160...igmpsnoop add routerport naming_set_list vlan vlan_set

161...igmpsnoop remove routerport naming_set_list vlan vlan_set

162...igmpsnoop show vlanlist

163...igmpsnoop show configinfo vlan vlan_set

164...igmpsnoop show mgroups vlan vlan_set

165...igmpsnoop activate vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr [hostport naming_set_list]

166...igmpsnoop add hostport naming_set_list vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

167...igmpsnoop remove hostport naming_set_list vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

168...igmpsnoop delete vlan vlan_set [ip ipAddr]

169...igmpsnoop show staticmgroups [vlan vlan_set] [ip ipAddr]

170...igmpforcedrep enable vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr routerport naming_set_list [version {1 | 2 | 3}] [repintv reporting_interval]

171...igmpforcedrep config vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr [version {1 | 2 | 3}] [repintv reporting_interval]

172...igmpforcedrep add routerport naming_set_list vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

173...igmpforcedrep remove routerport naming_set_list vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

174...igmpforcedrep disable vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

175...igmpforcedrep show [vlan vlan_set] [ip ipAddr]

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 413/432

Page 416: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

Link Aggregation Management Commands

176...linkagg activate lag lag_userlabel adminkey adminkey_value [ets | bridge] [size lagsize_value] [maxmtu mtu_value] [vlanprotprof vlanprotprof_userlabel] [trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [floodinglimit floodinglimit_value] [asap asap_userlabel]

177...linkagg config lag lag_userlabel [size lagsize_value] [maxmtu mtu_value] [vlanprotprof vlanprotprof_userlabel] [trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [floodinglimit floodinglimit_value] asap asap_userlabel

178...linkagg config neprio ne_pri

179...linkagg delete lag lag_userlabel

180...linkagg show lag lag_userlabel

181...linkagg show laglist

182...linkagg port naming_set_list bind lag lag_userlabel [pri port_lnkaggpri]

183...linkagg port naming_set_list config pri port_lnkaggpri

184...linkagg port naming_set_list unbind

185...linkagg port naming_set_list show info

Port Segregation Management Commands

186...portseg activate [port naming_set_list]

187...portseg add port naming_set_list

188...portseg remove port naming_set_list

189...portseg delete

190...portseg show info

Performance Monitoring Management Commands

191...pmmaint show port naming

192...pmmaint show service flow_userlabel

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02414/432

Page 417: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

193...pmmaint show ethphy naming

194...pmqos activate port naming

195...pmqos delete port naming

196...pmqos show port naming currentdata

197...pmqos show port naming historydata

198...pmqos activate service flow_userlabel

199...pmqos delete service flow_userlabel

200...pmqos show service flow_userlabel currentdata

201...pmqos show service flow_userlabel historydata

202...pmqos show granularity

Support Management Commands

203...alarmlist [domain domain_name] [severity severity] [time [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss[- [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss]] [position naming]

204...alarmsynth [domain | severity]

205...log info

206...log alarm [domain domain_name] [severity severity] [time [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss[- [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss]] [position naming]

207...log event [time [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss[-[yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss]] [position naming]

208...severitydef config severity

209...severitydef show

210...alarmprofile create alarmprofile_userlabel [cloneof alarmprofile_userlabel] [pcauselist pcause:confseverity:confseverityna [pcause:confseverity:confseverityna]...]

211...alarmprofile delete alarmprofile_userlabel

212...alarmprofile config alarmprofile_userlabel pcauselist pcause:confseverity: confseveritynsa [pcause:confseverity:confseveritynsa]

213...alarmprofile rename alarmprofile_userlabel into alarmprofile_userlabel

214...alarmprofile show [alarmprofile_userlabel]

215...swpkg activate pkgversion [forced]

216...swpkg commit

217...swpkg show {info [pkg pkgversion] | board naming}

218...swpkg restart

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 415/432

Page 418: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

219...swpkg show profile

220...ne location nelocation

221...ne label ne_userlabel

222...ne mgr {B$ | E$}

223...ne show info

224...accessctrl config timeout resptimeout

225...accessctrl request

226...accessctrl release

227...accessctrl show info

228...ne time [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss

229...ntp {enable | disable}

230...ntp serverip {main ipAddr spare ipAddr | main ipAddr | spare ipAddr}

231...ne show time

232...ntp show

233...resource show {ne | board naming}

234...abnormalcond show

235...plugandplay {confirmed | full | no}

236...plugandplay show

Communication&Routing Management Commands

237...ne ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask udp transportPortNumber

238...ne show addr

239...autodiscovery {enable | disable}

240...autodiscovery show

241...os {ipmain ipAddr udpmain transportPortNumber | ipspare ipAddr udpspare transportPortNumber | ipmain ipAddr udpmain transportPortNumber ipspare ipAddr udpspare transportPortNumber}

242...os show

243...mgmtport activate ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]}

244...mgmtport config { ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]} | ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask | ip ipAddr routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]} | ipmask ipAddrBitMask routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]} | ip ipAddr | ipmask ipAddrBitMask | routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]}}

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02416/432

Page 419: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

245...mgmtport delete

246...mgmtport show

247...dcn activate port naming vlan vlan_id routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]}

248...dcn config port naming { vlan vlan_id routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]} | vlan vlan_id | routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]}}

249...dcn delete port naming

250...dcn show [port naming]

251...ospfarea activate ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask stubflag {y | n}

252...ospfarea config id ospfarea_index {ipmask ipAddrBitMask stubflag {y | n} | ipmask ipAddrBitMask | stubflag {y | n}}

253...ospfarea delete id ospfarea_index

254...ospfarea show

255...routingstatic activate ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask gateway ipAddr port naming

256...routingstatic delete ip ipAddr

257...routingstatic show [ip ipAddr]

258...routing show info

Security Management Commands

259...user create login user_login userprofile user_profile

260...user delete login user_login

261...user changepwd

262...user changepwd login user_login

263...user show

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 417/432

Page 420: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

17.2 CLI commands listed in Alphabetical Order

A

abnormalcond show

accessctrl config timeout resptimeout

accessctrl release

accessctrl request

accessctrl show info

acl add acl_userlabel element {permit | deny} order aceorder_number macda macAddr [macdabitmask macBitMask] macsa macAddr [macsabitmask macBitMask] vlan vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] ethertype ethertype_value[-maxEthertype_value]

acl create acl_userlabel

acl delete acl_userlabel

acl disable acl_userlabel

acl enable acl_userlabel

acl remove acl_userlabel element ace_index

acl show [acl_userlabel]

alarmlist [domain domain_name] [severity severity] [time [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss[- [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss]] [position naming]

alarmprofile config alarmprofile_userlabel pcauselist pcause:confseverity: confseveritynsa [pcause:confseverity:confseveritynsa]

alarmprofile create alarmprofile_userlabel [cloneof alarmprofile_userlabel] [pcauselist pcause:confseverity:confseverityna [pcause:confseverity:confseverityna]...]

alarmprofile delete alarmprofile_userlabel

alarmprofile rename alarmprofile_userlabel into alarmprofile_userlabel

alarmprofile show [alarmprofile_userlabel]

alarmsynth [domain | severity]

autodiscovery {enable | disable}

autodiscovery show

B

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02418/432

Page 421: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

bridge port naming_set_list config [ingressfilter {on | off}] [acceptableframetype {all | vlan-tagged}] [pvid vlan_id] [defaultpri {0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7}] [regenerationpritable 0:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 1:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 2:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 3:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 4:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 5:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 6:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 7:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7}]

bridge port naming_set_list show info [vlan vlan_set]

bridge show type

bridge type {mac | virtual | provider}

bridge vlan activate vlan_set [portset naming_set_list#1 [u] [naming_set_list#2 [u] naming_set_list#n [u]]]

bridge vlan add vlan_set portset naming_set_list#1 [u] [naming_set_list#2 [u] naming_set_list#n [u]]

bridge vlan delete vlan_set

bridge vlan remove vlan_set portset naming_set_list#1 [u] [naming_set_list#2 [u] naming_set_list#n [u]]

bridge vlan show [vlan_set]

bridge vlanprotprofile activate vlanprotprof_userlabel [type ethertype_value]

bridge vlanprotprofile bind vlanprotprof_userlabel

bridge vlanprotprofile default

bridge vlanprotprofile delete vlanprotprof_userlabel

bridge vlanprotprofile show [vlanprotprof_userlabel]

bridgedbfiltering activate mac macAddr [vlan vlan_id] [portin naming] [portout naming_set_list]

bridgedbfiltering agetime filterDbAgeTime_value

bridgedbfiltering delete mac macAddr [vlan vlan_id] [portin naming]

bridgedbfiltering show agetime

bridgedbfiltering show multicast-dynamic [mac macAddr] [vlan vlan_id]

bridgedbfiltering show multicast-static [mac macAddr] [vlan vlan_id]

bridgedbfiltering show overloads

bridgedbfiltering show unicast-dynamic mac macAddr [vlan vlan_id ] [portout naming_set_list]

bridgedbfiltering show unicast-static [mac macAddr] [vlan vlan_id]

C

cbpdu activate flow_userlabel port naming svlan vlan_id

colorprofile activate colorprof_userlabel {pri {allg | ally | pri_set} | dscp {default | allg | ally | dscp_set}}

colorprofile delete colorprof_userlabel

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 419/432

Page 422: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

colorprofile show [colorprof_userlabel]

D

dcn activate port naming vlan vlan_id routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]}

dcn config port naming { vlan vlan_id routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]} | vlan vlan_id | routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]}}

dcn delete port naming

dcn show [port naming]

E

eqpt position naming reset

eqpt position naming_set_list asap asap_userlabel

eqpt position naming_set_list show allowedeqpt

eqpt position naming_set_list show asap

eqpt position naming_set_list show info

eqpt position naming_set_list show ri

eqpt position naming_set_list show type

eqpt position naming_set_list type eqpt_type

eqpt prot manualswitch from naming to naming

eqpt prot show unit naming

eqpt show allpositions

eqpt show linkstatus

eqpt show nename

extpoint in extpointin_naming asap asap_userlabel

extpoint in extpointin_naming show asap

extpoint in extpointin_naming userlabel extpoint_userlabel

extpoint out extpointout_naming criteria {manual | remote | auto {eventtype_id | eventtype_name}}

extpoint out extpointout_naming userlabel extpoint_userlabel

extpoint show in

extpoint show out

extpoint show outeventslist

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02420/432

Page 423: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

F

flow show

flowgroup activate flowgroup_userlabel port naming trafficdescriptor trafficdescriptor_userlabel policingmode {c-blind | ietfc-aware | mefc-aware-cf0 | mefc-aware-cf1 | disabled} [colorprofile colorprof_userlabel]

flowgroup delete flowgroup_userlabel

flowgroup show [flowgroup_userlabel]

I

igmpforcedrep add routerport naming_set_list vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

igmpforcedrep config vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr [version {1 | 2 | 3}] [repintv reporting_interval]

igmpforcedrep disable vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

igmpforcedrep enable vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr routerport naming_set_list [version {1 | 2 | 3}] [repintv reporting_interval]

igmpforcedrep remove routerport naming_set_list vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

igmpforcedrep show [vlan vlan_set] [ip ipAddr]

igmpsnoop activate vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr [hostport naming_set_list]

igmpsnoop add hostport naming_set_list vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

igmpsnoop add routerport naming_set_list vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop config vlan vlan_set [gmi group_membership_interval] [lmqc last_member_query_count] [lmqi last_member_query_interval] [mrt max_response_time] [routertimeout router_timeout] [proxyversion {1 | 2 | 3}]

igmpsnoop delete vlan vlan_set [ip ipAddr]

igmpsnoop disable vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop enable vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop fastleave disable port naming_set_list vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop fastleave enable port naming_set_list vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop proxyrep disable vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop proxyrep enable vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop remove hostport naming_set_list vlan vlan_id ip ipAddr

igmpsnoop remove routerport naming_set_list vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop show configinfo vlan vlan_set

igmpsnoop show mgroups vlan vlan_set

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 421/432

Page 424: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

igmpsnoop show staticmgroups [vlan vlan_set] [ip ipAddr]

igmpsnoop show vlanlist

inflowclassifier add flow_userlabel [vlan {vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] | dontcare| untagged }] [pri {pri[-maxpri] | dontcare | untagged}] [dscp {dscp[-maxdscp] | dontcare | noip}]

inflowclassifier remove classifier_id

inflowclassifier show [flow_userlabel]

interface position naming_set_list acl bind acl_userlabel

interface position naming_set_list acl show

interface position naming_set_list acl unbind

interface position naming_set_list l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}

interface position naming_set_list localeth {activate | deactivate}

interface position naming_set_list localeth admittedfractionalrate admitted_fractional_rate

interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg {enable | disable}

interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg advertisedcapability [10 | 100 | 1000 | 10&100 | 10&100&1000] [nopause | asympause | sympause | asym&sympause]

interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg restart

interface position naming_set_list localeth defaultflowcontrol {nopause | asympause | sympause}

interface position naming_set_list localeth defaulttype {10 | 100 | 1000 | 10ge-r | 10ge-sr | 10ge-lr | 10ge-er}

interface position naming_set_list localeth ethasap asap_userlabel

interface position naming_set_list localeth floodinglimit floodinglimit_value

interface position naming_set_list localeth loopback {line | internal} {enable | disable}

interface position naming_set_list localeth maxmtu mtu_value

interface position naming_set_list localeth portservice {ets | bridge}

interface position naming_set_list localeth rcfaction {none | shutdown}

interface position naming_set_list localeth show autoneg

interface position naming_set_list localeth show ethinfo

interface position naming_set_list localeth show loopback

interface position naming_set_list localeth show mauinfo

interface position naming_set_list localeth show rcfaction

interface position naming_set_list localeth show trafficconditioning

interface position naming_set_list localeth trafficstatus {enable | disable}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth {activate | deactivate}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth asap asap_userlabel

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02422/432

Page 425: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth csf {disable | bidir | unidir | backward | univcais}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth errorframe {abortseq | fcs}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth fcs {disable | enable}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth flag {one | two}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth floodinglimit floodinglimit_value

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth maxmtu mtu_value

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth portservice {ets | bridge}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth ratelimited ratelimited_value

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth show ethinfo

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth show mappinginfo

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth show trafficconditioning

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth sl {auto | eqptnonspec}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth trafficstatus {enable | disable}

interface position naming_set_list show l2ctrlframe

interface position naming_set_list show vlanprotprofile

interface position naming_set_list show vlanset

interface position naming_set_list vlanprotprofile activate vlanprotprof_userlabel [type ethertype_value]

interface position naming_set_list vlanprotprofile bind vlanprotprof_userlabel

interface position naming_set_list vlanprotprofile default

interface position naming_set_list vlanprotprofile show [vlanprotprof_userlabel]

interface show [naming_set_list]

interface trafficshow [naming_set_list]

intf position naming_set_list localeth config [defaulttype {10 | 100 | 1000 | 10ge-r | 10ge-sr | 10ge-lr | 10ge-er}] [asap asap_userlabel] [rcfaction {none | shutdown}] [trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [floodinglimit floodinglimit_value] [portservice {ets | bridge}] [maxmtu mtu_value] [defaultflowcontrol {nopause | asympause | sympause}] [admittedfractionalrate admitted_fractional_rate] [ethasap asap_userlabel]

intf position naming_set_list remoteeth config [ratelimited ratelimited_value] [sl {auto | eqptnonspec}] [trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [floodinglimit floodinglimit_value] [asap asap_userlabel] [portservice {ets | bridge}] [maxmtu mtu_value] [[[csf {disable | bidir | unidir | backward | univcais}] [fcs {disable | enable}]] | [[flag {one | two}] [errorframe {abortseq | fcs}]]]

L

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 423/432

Page 426: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

linkagg activate lag lag_userlabel adminkey adminkey_value [ets | bridge] [size lagsize_value] [maxmtu mtu_value] [vlanprotprof vlanprotprof_userlabel] [trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [floodinglimit floodinglimit_value] [asap asap_userlabel]

linkagg config lag lag_userlabel [size lagsize_value] [maxmtu mtu_value] [vlanprotprof vlanprotprof_userlabel] [trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [floodinglimit floodinglimit_value] asap asap_userlabel

linkagg config neprio ne_pri

linkagg delete lag lag_userlabel

linkagg port naming_set_list bind lag lag_userlabel [pri port_lnkaggpri]

linkagg port naming_set_list config pri port_lnkaggpri

linkagg port naming_set_list show info

linkagg port naming_set_list unbind

linkagg show lag lag_userlabel

linkagg show laglist

log alarm [domain domain_name] [severity severity] [time [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss[- [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss]] [position naming]

log event [time [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss[-[yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss]] [position naming]

log info

M

mgmtport activate ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]}

mgmtport config { ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]} | ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask | ip ipAddr routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]} | ipmask ipAddrBitMask routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]} | ip ipAddr | ipmask ipAddrBitMask | routingprot {none | ospf [ospfarea ospfarea_index]}}

mgmtport delete

mgmtport show

mstp cist config [pri bridge_pri] [maxage bridge_max_age] [hellotime bridge_hello_time] [fwddelay bridge_forward_delay]

mstp cist port naming_set_list config [forcestate {dynamic | blocked | forwarding}] [adminxctype {edge | ptp | noptp | auto}] [pri port_pri] [pathcost port_path_cost]

mstp cist port naming_set_list show info

mstp cist show info

mstp msti mstp_instance vlan vlan_set

mstp msti mstp_instance_set activate

mstp msti mstp_instance_set config [pri bridge_pri]

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02424/432

Page 427: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

mstp msti mstp_instance_set delete

mstp msti mstp_instance_set port naming_set_list config [forcestate {dynamic | blocked | forwarding}] [pri port_pri] [pathcost port_path_cost]

mstp msti mstp_instance_set port naming_set_list show info

mstp msti mstp_instance_set show info

mstp show msti [vlan vlan_set]

mstp show vlan [msti mstp_instance_set]

N

ne ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask udp transportPortNumber

ne label ne_userlabel

ne location nelocation

ne mgr {B$ | E$}

ne show addr

ne show info

ne show time

ne time [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss

ntp {enable | disable}

ntp serverip {main ipAddr spare ipAddr | main ipAddr | spare ipAddr}

ntp show

O

os {ipmain ipAddr udpmain transportPortNumber | ipspare ipAddr udpspare transportPortNumber | ipmain ipAddr udpmain transportPortNumber ipspare ipAddr udpspare transportPortNumber}

os show

ospfarea activate ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask stubflag {y | n}

ospfarea config id ospfarea_index {ipmask ipAddrBitMask stubflag {y | n} | ipmask ipAddrBitMask | stubflag {y | n}}

ospfarea delete id ospfarea_index

ospfarea show

P

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 425/432

Page 428: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

pbflowbid activate flow_userlabel port naming classificationmode {pri | dscp} inflowclassifier [vlan {vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] | dontcare| untagged}] [pri {pri[-maxpri] | dontcare | untagged}] [dscp {dscp[-maxdscp] | dontcare | noip}] trafficdescriptor trafficdescriptor_userlabel svlan vlan_id [l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}] [policingmode {c-blind | ietfc-aware | mefc-aware-cf0 | mefc-aware-cf1 | disabled}] [colorprofile colorprofile_userlabel] [pop] [push cvlan vlan_id mode {colorblind | coloraware} cpri pri [cpriyellow priyellow]] [flowgroup flowgroup_userlabel]

pbflowbid config flow_userlabel l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}

pbflowbid delete flow_userlabel

pbflowbid show [flow_userlabel]

pbflowinunidir activate flow_userlabel port naming classificationmode {pri | dscp} inflowclassifier [vlan {vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] | dontcare| untagged}] [pri {pri[-maxpri] | dontcare | untagged}] [dscp {dscp[-maxdscp] | dontcare | noip}] trafficdescriptor trafficdescriptor_userlabel svlan vlan_id [l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}] [policingmode {c-blind | ietfc-aware | mefc-aware-cf0 | mefc-aware-cf1 | disabled}] [colorprofile colorprofile_userlabel] [pop] [flowgroup flowgroup_userlabel]

pbflowinunidir config flow_userlabel l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}

pbflowinunidir delete flow_userlabel

pbflowinunidir show [flow_userlabel]

pbflowoutunidir activate flow_userlabel port naming svlan vlan_id [push cvlan vlan_id mode {colorblind | coloraware} cpri pri [cpriyellow priyellow]]

pbflowoutunidir delete flow_userlabel

pbflowoutunidir show [flow_userlabel]

plugandplay {confirmed | full | no}

plugandplay show

pmmaint show ethphy naming

pmmaint show port naming

pmmaint show service flow_userlabel

pmqos activate port naming

pmqos activate service flow_userlabel

pmqos delete port naming

pmqos delete service flow_userlabel

pmqos show granularity

pmqos show port naming currentdata

pmqos show port naming historydata

pmqos show service flow_userlabel currentdata

pmqos show service flow_userlabel historydata

portportbid activate flow_userlabel port1 naming port2 naming

portportbid delete flow_userlabel

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02426/432

Page 429: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

portportbid show [flow_userlabel]

portseg activate [port naming_set_list]

portseg add port naming_set_list

portseg delete

portseg remove port naming_set_list

portseg show info

R

resource show {ne | board naming}

routing show info

routingstatic activate ip ipAddr ipmask ipAddrBitMask gateway ipAddr port naming

routingstatic delete ip ipAddr

routingstatic show [ip ipAddr]

S

severitydef config severity

severitydef show

stp config [vlan vlan_set] [pri bridge_pri] [maxage bridge_max_age] [hellotime bridge_hello_time] [fwddelay bridge_forward_delay]

stp disable

stp enable {stp | rstp | pervlanrstp | mstp}

stp port naming_set_list config [vlan vlan_set] [pri port_pri] [pathcost port_path_cost] [forcestate {dynamic | blocked | forwarding}] [adminxctype {edge | ptp | noptp | auto}]

stp port naming_set_list show info [vlan vlan_set]

stp show info [vlan vlan_set]

stp show type

swpkg activate pkgversion [forced]

swpkg commit

swpkg restart

swpkg show {info [pkg pkgversion] | board naming}

swpkg show profile

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 427/432

Page 430: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

T

trafficdescriptor activate trafficdescriptor_userlabel traffictype {be | reg | gua | group} cir cir_value {pir pir_value | eir eir_value} cbs cbs_value {pbs pbs_value | ebs ebs_value}

trafficdescriptor delete trafficdescriptor_userlabel

trafficdescriptor show [trafficdescriptor_userlabel]

U

user changepwd

user changepwd login user_login

user create login user_login userprofile user_profile

user delete login user_login

user show

V

vlanprotprofile activate vlanprotprof_userlabel [type ethertype_value]

vlanprotprofile delete vlanprotprof_userlabel

vlanprotprofile show [vlanprof_userlabel]

CLI Operation Guide

CLI Quick Reference

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02428/432

Page 431: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

ABBREVIATIONSIn the following table are listed the abbreviations related to this Handbook only.

For a complete set of Abbreviations with the relevant meanings and a Glossary of Terms refer to the relevant Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 CT Operations Guide.

ABBREVIATION MEANING

CLI Command Line Interface

CT Craft Terminal

N/A Not Applicable (CLI command without indexes definition)

TSS Transport Service Switch

(tba) To Be Added

(tbc) To Be Confirmed

CLI Operation Guide

Abbreviations

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 429/432

Page 432: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CLI Operation Guide

Abbreviations

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02430/432

Page 433: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION FEEDBACK

The meaning of this section is to collect customer feedback about this handbook.

Scope of this activity is the improvement and innovation of customer documentation through the understand-ing of customer needs.

Your comments are welcome.

Please send your comment also if you appreciate the handbook.

You can send them to your Local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assistance Center.

They will be addressed to the team in charge of the relevant manual.

The following form supplies an example only of useful info, as a guide of the type of expected feedback.

It is possible fill part of the form, add other data and so on.

How to send feedback:

• copying the example form, filling it and sending it to your Local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assistance Center. In this case handbook data are already available at the page bottom.

• using the same form available as a file in the relevant documentation CD-ROM, saving, filling and sending it by e-mail to your Local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assistance Center.

• creating a dedicated form on paper or file and sending it to your Local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assistance Center.

We’ll take into account of your suggestion.

We reserve to modify consequently the handbook according to the correctness and congruence of the sug-gestion and requests.

CLI Operation Guide

Customer Documentation Feedback

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02 431/432

Page 434: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

432

CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION FEEDBACK

Handbook DataHandbook title, release,version:Handbook type:Handbook part number and edition:

General Feedback EvaluationSUBJECT 5 (max) 4 3 2 1 (min)

Total evaluationInfo quantityInfo qualityInfo structureConsulting facilityLayout

Chapters Feedback EvaluationHANDBOOK PARTS 5 (max) 4 3 2 1 (min)

PREFACECHAPTER 1CHAPTER 2CHAPTER __CHAPTER __CHAPTER __CHAPTER __Your Comments (stricltly necessary when value is less than 3):

Suggestion for ImprovementWhich subject to deepen:

How to deepen:

Subject to eliminate or reduce

Other comments/suggestions

Errors Identified

Reader InfoName: Date:Company: Job:Address:E-mail:Phone: Fax:

CLI Operation Guide

Customer Documentation Feedback

1850 TSS-320 Rel. 2.0

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02432/432

Page 435: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

8DG 08136 GAAA Edition 02

Page 436: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

w

All rights reserved.Passing on and copying of this document,

use and communication of its contents is not permittedwithout written authorization from Alcatel -Lucent.

ww.alcatel-lucent.com

Page 437: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONSTotal Pages: 432 + 6

NOTES: ---

COVER LABELS(according to Alcatel-Lucent Italy binder format)

Alcatel - Lucent 1850

Rel. 2.0

1850 TSS-320

CLI Operation Guide

8DG 08136 GAAA - Ed. 02

Alcatel - Lucent 1850Rel. 2.0

1850 TSS-320

CLI Operation Guide - 8DG 08136 GAAA - Ed. 02

Alcatel - Lucent 1850 Rel. 2.0

1850 TSS-320CLI Operation Guide - 8DG 08136 GAAA - Ed. 02

Alcatel - Lucent 1850Rel. 2.0

1850 TSS-320CLI Operation Guide - 8DG 08136 GAAA - Ed. 02

Page 438: Alcatel - Lucent 1850 TSS-320| Rel. 2.0 Alcatel - Lucent 1850 PN 8DG 08136 GAAA RELEASE DATE = July 2010 ISSUE 02 CLI OPERATION GUIDE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

HANDBOOK EDITORIAL INFORMATION

CLI Operation Guide

Ed. 02

July 2010

Change Note: 68740

Appraisal: E.Di Lorenzo - M.Lenti

Author: C. Gianni

Released8DG 08136 GAAA

Alcatel - Lucent 1850 Rel. 2.0

1850 TSS-320

Unit: Carrier Optics OMSN Vimercate